JP4825036B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each identifiable.

  Conventionally, for this type of slot machine, an internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not winning is allowed, and when winning is won in this internal lottery, a winning flag indicating the winning winning is set and winning For example, it is common to control a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination (a combination of symbols) on a variable display device composed of a plurality of reels with reference to a flag, and generate a winning according to the winning combination. It is.

  The winning flag is generally set by setting the value of the bit assigned for each winning combination to 1. For example, when there are 8 types of winning combinations, if any one winning combination is won, the value of the bit assigned to the winning winning combination is set to 1 and the other values are set to 0. The winning flag indicating that the winning combination is won is set, and the variable display device is controlled by referring to the value of the bit assigned to each winning combination. If another winning combination is won while the bonus is being carried over, a winning flag is set to the winning combination bit in addition to the bit assigned to the bonus being carried over (for example, , See Patent Document 1).

  In addition, after the display result is derived to the variable display device, it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established according to the derived display result. Check whether the winning flag is set for each winning combination, and if the winning combination is established even though the winning flag is not set, it is determined that an abnormal program is operating. Some perform error processing (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2005-152465 A JP 2005-143626 A

  However, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, there may be a case where a plurality of winning flags are set such as when the bonus is carried over as described above. When selecting in accordance with the winning combination, it is necessary to check all bit values assigned to each winning combination and select a control pattern corresponding to the result.

  In addition, in the slot machine described in Patent Document 2, if a winning combination is established as described above, it is confirmed whether or not a winning flag is set for each winning combination. The winning flag of the winning winning combination is identified, and the value of the identified bit is checked to determine whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred. It was necessary to determine whether.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such a problem, and is a slot machine capable of efficiently performing a process for selecting a control pattern of a variable display device and a process for performing an abnormal winning determination. The purpose is to provide.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by displaying and displaying the display results of the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display results of the variable display devices. ) And
It is means for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device is derived, and it is possible to determine that a plurality of types of winnings are allowed per game. Pre-decision means (a lottery of a role by the CPU 41a, and a special role and a general role can be won at the same time in a normal gaming state)
n (n is a positive integer) increasing value (n in this embodiment is 1), corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determining means (combination of the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role) Determination number setting means for setting a determination number corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means (using the winning number for the special role and the winning number for the general role, [4 × Special role winning number + General role winning number], which is the decision number, is calculated and stored in the A register (where 4 is the number of types of general roles)
Derivation control data storage area (index area of stop control data in ROM 41b) for storing derivation control data (index data indicating the start address of the storage area of stop control data) used when the display result is derived by the variable display device ) Including data storage means (ROM 41b);
An address calculation unit (first index data) which calculates an address corresponding to the determination number, which is an address assigned to the storage area of the data storage unit, using the determination number set by the determination number setting unit The start address of the storage area of the index data corresponding to the determination number is calculated using the start address of the storage area (ctrldata_index) and the determination number. Specifically, the storage address of the index data is calculated by [ctrldata_index + 2 × determination number] Processing)
Based on the address calculated by the address calculating means, derived control data selecting means (calculated from the determined number) for selecting derived control data corresponding to the determined number from the derived control data stored in the derived control data storage area. Select the index data stored at the specified address, and set this index data in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr)),
Derivation control means for controlling the variable display device to derive the display result based on the derivation control data selected by the derivation control data selection means (refer to the address stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr)) Reel stop control processing according to the stop control data acquired by
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, abnormal winning determination data (permitted role) that can specify whether or not the winning is allowed in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning. An abnormal winning determination data setting means (a special winning combination number and a winning combination flag) for setting an abnormal winning determination flag having a bit value assigned to 0 as 0 and a bit value assigned to an unacceptable role as 1 A process of converting the winning number of the general role into an internal winning flag in which the value of the bit assigned to the permitted role is set to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the not allowed role is set to 0; Conversion to an abnormal winning determination flag by reversing all bits of the flag),
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned to each winning type based on the derived displaying result (winning result) Winning result data setting means for setting a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the non-winning winning portion to 0 (stopped symbol after all reels are stopped) Process to create a winning design flag from
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the logical product operation is 0 or not, that is, other than 0) Processing for determining an abnormal prize when there is at least one value of)
And a storage area for unused area and the data read and writable stores never read and write of data is performed, stores the decision number corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination unit as the storage area Work area (important work, general work, special work, set value work, unsaved work) where data for game control including a decision number storage area to be stored is stored , and data can be temporarily stored Possible stack area, and at least allocated data storage means;
Data saving means for temporarily saving data in use to the stack area (saving of registers by the CPU 41a);
Data restoration means (register restoration by the CPU 41a) for restoring the data saved in the stack area by the saving means;
An unused stack area specifying means (calculation of the size of the unused area from the stack pointer by the CPU 41a) for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
When any one of a plurality of types of initialization conditions (before setting start, at the end of a big bonus, at the time of power-on, when the RAM 41c is not broken and at the end of one game) is satisfied, the data storage means Initializing means for initializing an area defined in accordance with the type of initialization condition established among the storage areas in the memory (the CPU 41a initializes the designated area of the RAM 41c upon establishment of the initialization condition);
With
The data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization unit initializes the unused area and the unused stack area even when any of the plurality of types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and corresponds to two or more types of initialization conditions. Initialization start address (start address) in the data storage means is set, and initialization area setting means (initialization table (ROM 41b) (ROM 41b) in which an initialization end address (end address) common to the initialization conditions is set. 63 (b)), when the initialization condition is satisfied, from the initialization start address set in the initialization area setting means corresponding to the type of the initialization condition to the initialization end address a storage area to initialize each address is assigned to,
The unused area and the unused stack area of the stack area are allocated to storage areas with consecutive addresses,
In the initialization area setting means, an address indicating a boundary between the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means and the stack area in use is set as an initialization end address.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, n (n is a positive value) regardless of whether it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of any one winning is permitted or whether the generation of a plurality of types of winnings is allowed. Integer), and a unique determination number is set for the determination result determined by the pre-determining means, so that it is determined by the pre-determining means that any one winning is allowed. Even if the situation is determined to permit the generation of multiple types of winnings, both are stored in the data storage means based on the address calculated using the determined number The derivation control data can be selected, and when selecting the derivation control data, it is not necessary to check the winning flags for all winnings as in the conventional case, so the process for selecting the derivation control data is simplified. It is possible.
In addition, since the decision number is a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), a winning flag having 1 assigned to a winning prize won as in the past, that is, regularly increasing. It is possible to calculate the address corresponding to the decision number, that is, the address used when selecting the derivation control data, by simple calculation, rather than using a value that is not used.
In addition, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, it is only necessary to calculate the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data and determine the result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a win, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag for winning that has been established as before and check the value of the specified bit. It is possible to simplify the process for making such a determination.
Also, by setting only the initialization start address corresponding to two or more types of initialization conditions and the initialization end address common to these initialization conditions, the initialization end corresponding to the type of initialization conditions is completed. Since the storage area corresponding to the type of initialization condition can be initialized without individually setting the address, the program capacity for performing a plurality of types of initialization can be reduced.
A slot machine according to claim 2 of the present invention,
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by displaying and displaying the display results of the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display results of the variable display devices. ) And
It is means for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device is derived, and it is possible to determine that a plurality of types of winnings are allowed per game. Pre-decision means (a lottery of a role by the CPU 41a, and a special role and a general role can be won at the same time in a normal gaming state)
n (n is a positive integer) increasing value (n in this embodiment is 1), corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determining means (combination of the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role) Determination number setting means for setting a determination number corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means (using the winning number for the special role and the winning number for the general role, [4 × Special role winning number + General role winning number], which is the decision number, is calculated and stored in the A register (where 4 is the number of types of general roles)
Derivation control data storage area (index area of stop control data in ROM 41b) for storing derivation control data (index data indicating the start address of the storage area of stop control data) used when the display result is derived by the variable display device ) Including data storage means (ROM 41b);
An address calculation unit (first index data) which calculates an address corresponding to the determination number, which is an address assigned to the storage area of the data storage unit, using the determination number set by the determination number setting unit The start address of the storage area of the index data corresponding to the determination number is calculated using the start address of the storage area (ctrldata_index) and the determination number. Specifically, the storage address of the index data is calculated by [ctrldata_index + 2 × determination number] Processing)
Based on the address calculated by the address calculating means, derived control data selecting means (calculated from the determined number) for selecting derived control data corresponding to the determined number from the derived control data stored in the derived control data storage area. Select the index data stored at the specified address, and set this index data in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr)),
Derivation control means for controlling the variable display device to derive the display result based on the derivation control data selected by the derivation control data selection means (refer to the address stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr)) Reel stop control processing according to the stop control data acquired by
Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, abnormal winning determination data (permitted role) that can specify whether or not the winning is allowed in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning. An abnormal winning determination data setting means (a special winning combination number and a winning combination flag) for setting an abnormal winning determination flag having a bit value assigned to 0 as 0 and a bit value assigned to an unacceptable role as 1 A process of converting the winning number of the general role into an internal winning flag in which the value of the bit assigned to the permitted role is set to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the not allowed role is set to 0; Conversion to an abnormal winning determination flag by reversing all bits of the flag),
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned to each winning type based on the derived displaying result (winning result) Winning result data setting means for setting a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the non-winning winning portion to 0 (stopped symbol after all reels are stopped) Process to create a winning design flag from
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the logical product operation is 0 or not, that is, other than 0) Processing for determining an abnormal prize when there is at least one value of)
And a storage area for unused area and the data read and writable stores never read and write of data is performed, stores the decision number corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination unit as the storage area Work area (important work, general work, special work, set value work, unsaved work) where data for game control including a decision number storage area to be stored is stored , and data can be temporarily stored Possible stack area, and at least allocated data storage means;
Data saving means for temporarily saving data in use to the stack area (saving of registers by the CPU 41a);
Data restoration means (register restoration by the CPU 41a) for restoring the data saved in the stack area by the saving means;
An unused stack area specifying means (calculation of the size of the unused area from the stack pointer by the CPU 41a) for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
When any one of a plurality of types of initialization conditions (before setting start, at the end of a big bonus, at the time of power-on, when the RAM 41c is not broken and at the end of one game) is satisfied, the data storage means Initializing means for initializing an area defined in accordance with the type of initialization condition established among the storage areas in the memory (the CPU 41a initializes the designated area of the RAM 41c upon establishment of the initialization condition);
With
The data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization unit initializes the unused area and the unused stack area even when any of the plurality of types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and the data storage unit corresponds to the type of initialization condition. Initialization area setting means (initialization table of the ROM 41b (FIG. 17 (FIG. 17)) in which the initialization start address (start address) and the size of the storage area initialized to the initialization start address (initialization size) are set. b)), and when the initialization condition is satisfied, the initialization start address is set from the initialization start address set in the initialization area setting means corresponding to the type of the initialization condition. a storage area of a size which is initialized,
The unused area and the unused stack area of the stack area are allocated to storage areas with consecutive addresses,
In the initialization area setting means, a size according to the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means is set,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, n (n is a positive value) regardless of whether it is determined by the pre-determining means that the generation of any one winning is permitted or whether the generation of a plurality of types of winnings is allowed. Integer), and a unique determination number is set for the determination result determined by the pre-determining means, so that it is determined by the pre-determining means that any one winning is allowed. Even if the situation is determined to permit the generation of multiple types of winnings, both are stored in the data storage means based on the address calculated using the determined number The derivation control data can be selected, and when selecting the derivation control data, it is not necessary to check the winning flags for all winnings as in the conventional case, so the process for selecting the derivation control data is simplified. It is possible.
In addition, since the decision number is a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), a winning flag having 1 assigned to a winning prize won as in the past, that is, regularly increasing. It is possible to calculate the address corresponding to the decision number, that is, the address used when selecting the derivation control data, by simple calculation, rather than using a value that is not used.
In addition, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, it is only necessary to calculate the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data and determine the result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a win, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag for winning that has been established as before and check the value of the specified bit. It is possible to simplify the process for making such a determination.
Also, by setting only the initialization start address corresponding to the type of initialization condition and the size of the storage area initialized at that time, the initialization end address corresponding to the type of initialization condition is individually set. Without this, the storage area corresponding to the type of initialization condition can be initialized, so that the program capacity for performing a plurality of types of initialization can be reduced.

A slot machine according to claim 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 1 or 2 ,
The abnormal winning determination data setting means, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, out of the bits assigned for each type of winning, the value of the bit assigned to the winning allowed in the game An abnormal winning determination data in which 0 is set to 1 and the value of a bit assigned to a winning that is not allowed in the game is set to 1 (the value of a bit assigned to an allowed winning is set to 0 and the winning is not allowed) Set an abnormal winning determination flag with an assigned bit value of 1) (specify the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role, set the value of the bit assigned to the allowed role to 1, and allow Converted to an internal winning flag with the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination being 0, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag by inverting all bits of the internal winning flag)
The winning result data setting means includes a bit assigned to a winning generated based on the derived display result among the bits assigned for each kind of winning after the display result of the variable display device is derived. The winning result data (the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is set to 1, the winning value data is set to 1, and the value of the bit assigned to the winning that has not occurred based on the derived display result is set to 1) Set a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to a non-playing role to 0 (create a winning symbol flag from the stopped symbol after all reels have stopped),
The arithmetic means is a value between bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. AND operation (logical operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the AND operation is 0) If it is not 0, it is determined as an abnormal winning)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, the logical AND operation is performed on the values of the bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by determining whether or not there is even one value other than 0 among the results, and bother the bit of the winning flag of the winning that has been established as before. Since it is not necessary to specify and confirm the value of the specified bit, it is possible to simplify the process when determining whether or not the prize is abnormal.
The abnormal winning determination means determines that the prize is abnormal when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means. After performing an operation of inverting 1 and 0 of each bit, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal when the value of each bit is zero.
In addition, the calculation means includes bits in which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. And the abnormal winning determination means may determine that there is an abnormal winning when one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means is zero.

A slot machine according to claim 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 ,
The abnormal winning determination data setting means, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, out of the bits assigned for each type of winning, the value of the bit assigned to the winning allowed in the game 1 is an abnormal winning determination data in which the value of a bit assigned to a winning that is not allowed in the game is 0 (a value of a bit assigned to an allowed winning is set to 1, and a role that is not allowed) An abnormal winning determination flag in which the value of the assigned bit is 0) is set (the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role are converted into an abnormal winning determination flag (internal winning flag), as shown in FIG. Modified example),
The winning result data setting means includes a bit assigned to a winning generated based on the derived display result among the bits assigned for each kind of winning after the display result of the variable display device is derived. Winning result data in which the value of the bit assigned to a winning that has not occurred based on the derived display result is 1, and the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 0, Set a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination to 1 (the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is set to 1, and the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is set to 1) A modified example shown in FIG. 59, in which a winning symbol flag is created by inverting all bits of data set to 0),
The arithmetic means is a value between bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. OR operation (logical sum operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag, a modification shown in FIG. 59),
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when there is at least one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means (whether the result of OR operation is other than FFFFH, that is, 0 is 1). It is determined whether or not even a bit is included, and if it is other than FFFFH, it is determined as an abnormal prize, a modification shown in FIG. 59),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, logical OR operation is performed on values of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning by simply determining whether or not there is even one of the results, and it is necessary to bother identifying the winning flag bit that has been established as in the past Since it is not necessary to confirm the value of the specified bit, it is possible to simplify the processing when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning.
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means is 0, but each bit calculated by the calculating means After performing the operation of inverting 1 and 0, it may be determined that there is an abnormal winning when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit.
In addition, the calculation means includes bits in which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. And the abnormal winning determination means determines that the prize is abnormal when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means. good.

A slot machine according to claim 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to claim 3 ,
Based on the determination result (combination of the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role) based on the determination result of the pre-determining means (the winning lottery by the CPU 41a) First data in which the value of the bit assigned to the allowed winning is 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the winning that is not allowed in the game is 0 (the bit assigned to the allowed winning combination) The first data setting means for setting a value of 1 and an internal winning flag in which the value of a bit assigned to an unacceptable role is set to 0 (a winning number for a special role and a winning number for a general role are internal winning flags) Conversion process)
The abnormal winning determination data setting means calculates second data by performing an operation of inverting 1 and 0 of each bit of the first data set by the first data setting means, Second data is set as the abnormal winning determination data (the internal winning flag having all bits inverted is used as an abnormal winning determination flag)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, first data in which the value of a bit assigned to a winning permitted in the game is set to 1 and the value of a bit assigned to a winning not permitted in the game is set to 0 is first data. That is, after the same data as the conventional winning flag is created, 1 and 0 of each bit of the first data are inverted to set the abnormal winning determination data, so that the first data is used for other purposes. For example, it can be used for a test signal to be output to the outside or data for creating a command to be output to another board.

A slot machine according to a sixth aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The abnormal winning determination data (abnormal winning determination flag) corresponding to the determination result (combination of the winning number of the special combination and the winning number of the general combination) of the pre-determining means (the winning combination lottery by the CPU 41a) is stored. An abnormal winning determination data storage means (a modified example of a number / flag conversion table storing the abnormal winning determination flag values corresponding to possible winning number combinations);
The abnormal winning determination data setting means sets the abnormal winning determination data stored in the abnormal winning determination data storage means corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means (number / flag conversion table). Modified example that directly converts to abnormal winning determination data according to the combination of winning numbers using)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the abnormal winning determination data can be set with a simple procedure by simply referring to the data stored in the abnormal winning determination data storage means corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means. .

A slot machine according to claim 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 ,
Determination result storage means (in the RAM 41c) that stores determination result information (winning number) that is a value that can specify whether or not to allow the occurrence of a winning is determined by the prior determination means (the lottery by the CPU 41a). Special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and general role storage work (iwin_gen))
The abnormal winning determination data setting means calculates the abnormal winning determination data by performing a predetermined calculation using a value (winning number) stored in the determination result storage means. The abnormal winning determination data is set (the modified example shown in FIG. 60 is obtained by inverting all bits of the internal winning flag calculated by performing the operation of shifting the bit indicated by the winning number as the abnormal winning determining flag. ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the abnormal winning determination data can be set only by performing a predetermined calculation using the value stored in the determination result storage means, and the determination result and the abnormal winning determination data. Since the table data defining the correspondence relationship is not required, the program capacity can be reduced.

A slot machine according to claim 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 ,
It is a value that can specify whether or not it has been determined by the pre-determining means (the lottery of the combination by the CPU 41a) that the occurrence of a special prize (special combination) with a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player is permitted Special determination result storage means (special role storing work (iwin_bonus) in the RAM 41c) for storing certain special determination result information (a winning number of special role (including 00H indicating loss));
Ordinary decision result information (a winning number (indicating a loss) of a general combination) that is a value that can specify whether or not it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of a normal prize (general combination) other than the special prize is permitted. Normal determination result storage means (general role storing work (iwin_gen) in the RAM 41c),
For each game, normal determination result information setting means for setting the normal determination result information by the prior determination means of the game in the normal determination result storage means (generally based on the result every time an internal lottery process is performed) The process of storing the winning number of the role in the general role storage work (iwin_gen)),
When it is determined by the predetermining means that the special winning is permitted, the special determination result storing means is allowed to generate the special winning determined by the predetermining means of the game. Special decision result information that can specify the effect is set (when the winning of the special role is determined, the winning number of the special role indicating that is stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus)), and the special decision result The information is maintained until the permitted special winnings are generated (once the winning number of the special role is stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus), the value is cleared until the special role is won thereafter. Special determination result information (00H) that can specify that the occurrence of the special prize is not permitted in the special decision result storage means when the special prize is generated. Decision (When the special combination is won, the process of clearing the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus)) result information setting means and,
With
The determination number setting means includes a value stored in the special determination result storage means (special role storing work (iwin_bonus) in the RAM 41c) and a normal determination result storing means (general role storing work (iwin_gen) in the RAM 41c). The determination number is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation using the stored value, and the calculated determination number is set.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the value stored in the special determination result storage unit and the normal determination result storage unit are stored regardless of whether the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over. The determination number can be set only by performing a predetermined calculation using the value. That is, it is possible to always set the decision number by a common method.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game values (medals), and a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine (slot machine 1) in which one game is completed by displaying and displaying the display results of the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a winning can be generated according to the display results of the variable display devices. ) And
A game value storage means (a credit counter assigned to the RAM 41c) for storing a game value (credit) owned by the player;
A bet number setting means for setting a bet number using at least the game value stored in the game value storage means (the CPU 41a subtracts the credit counter by detecting the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6) And setting control of the number of bets to which the BET counter is added)
Return control means (the CPU 41a is used for the return switch 19 to return the game value stored in the game value storage means in response to an operation of a predetermined game value return operation section (the checkout switch 10). The payment control for paying out the credit counter medals by detection)
Value giving processing means (CPU 41a) for performing a value giving process for giving a predetermined number of game values according to the type of the prize to be awarded when a prize winning (small role) accompanied by the game value is given. Is added to the credit counter by the number of medals according to the type of small role at the time of winning the small role, and pays out medals in excess of the upper limit of the credit counter)
Special game state transition means (the CPU 41a makes a big bonus when winning a big bonus when a transition prize (big bonus) accompanied by a transition of the game state occurs in a normal game (normal game state). Control to shift to)
Special game state end condition determination for determining whether a predetermined special game state end condition (the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds 345) is satisfied in the special game state (big bonus) Means (the CPU 41a determines whether or not the total number of payouts exceeds 345 for each game in the big bonus);
When the special game state end condition determining means determines that the end condition is satisfied, the special game state end means for terminating the special game state (the CPU 41a determines that the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus is 345. Control to end the big bonus when it exceeds)
A bet number setting prohibiting unit (the CPU 41a sets prohibition of inserting medals by setting at the start of the game and prohibits setting of a bet number by the bet number setting unit when the game starts. , Disable detection of the MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibiting means for prohibiting the return control by the return control means when the game is started (the CPU 41a invalidates the detection of the settlement switch 10 by the setting at the start of the game);
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, if a display result other than the display result corresponding to the prize winning is derived, it is determined that the game is over when the display result is derived, and the prize winning is dealt with. When the display result is derived, game end determination means for determining the end of the game when the value-adding process accompanying the generation of the prize-winning is completed (the determination of the end of the game by the CPU 41a, the winning with the medal payout occurs) For games that are not played, the end of the game is determined when all reels are stopped, and for games where a winning with a medal payout occurs, the game ends when the payout of the medal (addition of credits) ends. Judgment)
On the condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game, bet number setting prohibition canceling means for canceling prohibition of setting of the bet number by the betting number setting prohibiting means (cancellation of prohibition of medal insertion by the CPU 41a, 1 Sheet BET switch 5, detection of MAXBET switch 6),
Return control prohibition release means (validation of detection of the settlement switch 10 by the CPU 41a) for canceling prohibition of return control by the return control prohibition means on condition that the game end determination means determines the end of the game;
With
The bet number setting prohibition release means is configured to perform a predetermined release operation (reset) after the game end determination means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determination means. When the operation is performed, the betting number setting prohibiting means for canceling the bet number setting prohibition means (the CPU 41a controls the betting state after the end of the big bonus, When the reset operation is detected in the state, the process shifts to the next game, and at the beginning of the BET process of the next game, the inability to insert medals is canceled and the detection of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is enabled). Including
The return control prohibition canceling means is provided by the return control prohibiting means when the game end determining means determines the end of the game in the game in which the end condition is determined to be satisfied by the special gaming state end condition determining means. Including a return control prohibition canceling means for canceling the return control prohibition (the CPU 41a enables the detection of the settlement switch 10 before controlling the stop state),
The slot machine further includes
Before the display result of the variable display device is derived, it is determined whether or not to allow the occurrence of a special prize (special role) accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and a win including a normal prize (general role) other than the special prize. Pre-determining means capable of making a decision to allow a plurality of types of winnings per game (a lottery of a role by the CPU 41a, and a special role and a general role are won simultaneously in a normal gaming state) And)
n (n is a positive integer) increasing value (n is 1 in the present embodiment), and a plurality of special determination numbers (00H to 03H) indicating whether or not it is determined to allow the occurrence of the special prize Special decision number setting means for setting a special decision number corresponding to the decision result of the pre-decision means (special role storing work (iwin_bonus) from 00H to 03H in accordance with the lottery result) Process to set the winning number of the role)
A value that increases by n, and that sets a normal decision number corresponding to the decision result of the pre-determining means from a plurality of normal decision numbers that indicate whether or not it is decided to allow the occurrence of the normal winning Determination number setting means (processing for setting the winning number of the general combination corresponding to the lottery result from 00H to 04H in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen)),
Derivation control data storage area (index area of stop control data in ROM 41b) for storing derivation control data (index data indicating the start address of the storage area of stop control data) used when the display result is derived by the variable display device ) Including data storage means (ROM 41b);
The address assigned to the storage area of the data storage means using the special decision number set by the special decision number setting means and the normal decision number set by the normal decision number setting means, and the special decision Address calculating means for calculating an address corresponding to the combination of the number and the normal determination number (based on the top address (ctrldata_index) or (ctrldata_index2) of the index data storage area, the winning number of the special role, and the winning number of the general role The top address of the index data storage area corresponding to the combination of the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role is calculated. Specifically, when the winning number of the special role is 0, [ctrldata_index2 + 2 × When the index data storage address is calculated from the “winning number of general role” and the winning number of special role is other than 0 [Ctrldata_index + 2 × (4 × special role winning number + general role winning number)] to calculate the index data storage address, where 4 is the general role type),
Derivation control data selection means (stored at the calculated address) for selecting any derivation control data from the derivation control data stored in the derivation control data storage area based on the address calculated by the address calculation means. Select the index data of the stop control data being used, and set this index data in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr)),
Derivation control means for controlling the variable display device to derive the display result based on the derivation control data selected by the derivation control data selection means (refer to the address stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr)) Reel stop control processing according to the stop control data acquired by
Based on the special decision number set by the special decision number setting means and the normal decision number set by the normal decision number setting means, the winning is permitted in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning. Abnormal winning determination data that can specify whether or not the winning combination is made (the abnormal winning determination is such that the value of the bit assigned to the permitted combination is 0 and the value of the bit allocated to the unauthorized combination is 1) Data setting means for determining an abnormal winning determination (special role winning number and general role winning number are set to 1 for a bit assigned to an allowed role and assigned to an unacceptable role) A process of converting the value of the received bit into an internal winning flag that is 0, and a process of converting the internal winning flag into an abnormal winning determination flag by inverting all bits),
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned to each winning type based on the derived displaying result (winning result) Winning result data setting means for setting a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination to 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the non-winning winning portion to 0 (stopped symbol after all reels are stopped) Process to create a winning design flag from
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means (Logical AND operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determining whether or not the result of the logical product operation is 0; Processing)
Comprising
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether it is determined that the generation of any one prize is permitted or whether it is determined that the generation of a plurality of types of prizes is permitted, the occurrence of the special prize is permitted. One special decision number is set from a plurality of special decision numbers indicating whether or not a decision has been made, and one of the plurality of normal decision numbers indicating whether or not to allow the occurrence of a normal winning is decided Since a normal decision number is set, even in a situation where it is determined that one of the winnings is permitted, a situation where it is determined that a plurality of types of winnings are permitted. Both, it is only necessary to select the derivation control data stored in the data storage unit based on the address calculated using the special decision number and the normal decision number. All Since it requires winning flag for a winning without checking, and the process for selecting the derived control data can be simplified.
In addition, since both the special decision number and the normal decision number are values that regularly increase by n (n is a positive integer), a winning flag having 1 assigned to a winning winning as in the past, That is, rather than using a value that does not increase regularly, it is possible to calculate an address corresponding to a combination of a special decision number and a normal decision number, that is, an address used when selecting derivation control data, by simple calculation. .
In addition, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, it is only necessary to calculate the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data and determine the result. It is possible to determine whether or not it is a win, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag for winning that has been established as before and check the value of the specified bit. It is possible to simplify the process for making such a determination.
In addition, in a game where the end condition in the special gaming state is satisfied, the return control prohibition is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and betting is performed until a predetermined release operation such as a reset operation by a store clerk is performed after the game ends. Even during the period in which the setting of the number is prohibited (so-called hit state), it is possible to return the game value stored in the game value storage means without waiting for the release operation. Reflecting the player's will as much as possible, the game value stored as owned by the player can be returned. Thereby, in particular, it is possible to receive the return of the game value reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the special game state.

In claim 1, 2 and means 1, the predetermined number of bets is a bet number of at least 1 or more, and a game is set by setting a bet number of 2 or more or a maximum bet number. May be allowed to start. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, in claim 1, 2 and means 1, the pre-decision means is capable of making a decision to allow the generation of a plurality of types of winnings per game. It may be a decision to allow the occurrence of other winnings, or a new winning may be generated with the decision to allow any winnings being carried over from the previous game. It may be determined to allow the occurrence of both winnings by determining to allow.
Further, in the first, second , and means 1, the value increasing by n (n is a positive integer) is, for example, 0, 1, 2, 3,..., 0, 2, 4, 6. Any value such as 6, 9,.
In the first, second , and means 1, the derivation control data is data used when deriving the display result of the variable display device, and may be data in which the control content itself is stored. Further, it may be data (for example, an address of a storage location of control data) that is referred to when specifying data storing control contents.
Further, in the first, second , and means 1, the data storage means is a rewritable memory such as a RAM to which a storage area that is used as a work area by a CPU that controls the game is assigned.
The data storage means in claim 1, 2 and means 1 is a memory such as a ROM or RAM to which a storage area for storing data such as a program executed by a CPU for controlling a game and various data tables is allocated. It may be a rewritable memory or a read-only memory.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
The abnormal winning determination data setting means includes a special decision number (special role winning number) set by the special decision number setting means and a normal decision number (general role winning number) set by the normal decision number setting means. ), The bits assigned to the winnings allowed in the game among the bits assigned for each type of winning are set to 0, and the bits assigned to the winnings not allowed in the game Abnormal winning determination data with a value of 1 (abnormal winning determination flag with 0 as the value of the bit assigned to the permitted combination and 1 as the value of the bit allocated to the unacceptable combination) (The winning number for special roles and the winning number for general roles are set to 1 for the bits assigned to allowed roles and assigned to unacceptable roles. And the value of the bit is converted into the internal winning flag to 0, to convert the internal winning flag to congenital prize determination flag by inverting all bits),
The winning result data setting means includes a bit assigned to a winning generated based on the derived display result among the bits assigned for each kind of winning after the display result of the variable display device is derived. The winning result data (the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is set to 1, the winning value data is set to 1, and the value of the bit assigned to the winning that has not occurred based on the derived display result is set to 1) Set a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to a non-playing role to 0 (create a winning symbol flag from the stopped symbol after all reels have stopped),
The arithmetic means is a value between bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. AND operation (logical operation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag),
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means (determines whether the result of the AND operation is 0) If it is not 0, it is determined as an abnormal winning)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, the logical AND operation is performed on the values of the bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by determining whether or not there is even one value other than 0 among the results, and bother the bit of the winning flag of the winning that has been established as before. Since it is not necessary to specify and confirm the value of the specified bit, it is possible to simplify the process when determining whether or not the prize is abnormal.
The abnormal winning determination means determines that the prize is abnormal when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means. After performing an operation of inverting 1 and 0 of each bit, it may be determined that the prize is abnormal when the value of each bit is zero.
In addition, the calculation means includes bits in which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. And the abnormal winning determination means may determine that there is an abnormal winning when one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means is zero.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
The abnormal winning determination data setting means includes a special decision number (special role winning number) set by the special decision number setting means and a normal decision number (general role winning number) set by the normal decision number setting means. Based on the above, among the bits allocated for each type of winning, the value of the bit allocated to the winning allowed in the game is 1, and the bit allocated to the winning not allowed in the game Abnormal winning determination data with the value of 0 as an abnormal winning determination flag (the value of the bit assigned to the permitted combination is set to 1 and the value of the bit allocated to the unacceptable combination is set to 0) (The winning number for special roles and the winning number for general roles are set to 1 for the bits assigned to allowed roles and assigned to unacceptable roles. Processing for converting the internal winning flag, set the internal winning flag as it is abnormal winning determination flag to the value of the bit with 0, modification of FIG. 59),
The winning result data setting means includes a bit assigned to a winning generated based on the derived display result among the bits assigned for each kind of winning after the display result of the variable display device is derived. Winning result data in which the value of the bit assigned to a winning that has not occurred based on the derived display result is 1, and the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 0, Set a winning symbol flag that sets the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination as 1 (the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination in the stopped symbol after stopping all reels is set to 1 and no winning is made) A winning symbol flag is created by inverting all bits of data in which the value of the bit assigned to the combination is 0, a modification shown in FIG. 59),
The arithmetic means is a value between bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. Is ORed (OR calculation of abnormal winning determination flag and winning symbol flag)
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when there is at least one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means (whether the result of OR operation is other than FFFFH, that is, 0 is 1). It is determined whether or not even a bit is included, and if it is other than FFFFH, it is determined as an abnormal prize, a modification shown in FIG. 59),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, logical OR operation is performed on values of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data and the winning result data. It is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning by simply determining whether or not there is even one of the results, and it is necessary to bother identifying the winning flag bit that has been established as in the past Since it is not necessary to confirm the value of the specified bit, it is possible to simplify the processing when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning.
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means is 0, but each bit calculated by the calculating means After performing the operation of inverting 1 and 0, it may be determined that there is an abnormal winning when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit.
In addition, the calculation means includes bits in which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. And the abnormal winning determination means determines that the prize is abnormal when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means. good.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing (not shown) whose front surface is open and to a side end of the housing. And a front door that is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged so as to be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door.

  As shown in FIG. 2, “red 7 (black 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “BAR”, “replay”, “watermelon”, “cherry” are provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. ”,“ Bell ”, etc., a plurality of types of mutually identifiable symbols are drawn in a predetermined order. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 3), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously provided in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Further, on the front door, a medal insertion portion 4 capable of inserting medals, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a player's own game value) are used for one medal. 1 bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the number of bets, and using a credit, a specified number of bets determined according to the gaming state within the range (in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state described later) 3 is a MAXBET switch 6 that is operated when setting a challenge bonus and a regular bonus, which will be described later, and 2), and a medal stored as credit and a medal used for setting a bet are settled (credit and bet number) The payout switch 10 that is operated when the game is started, and the start switch 7 that is operated when the game is started. Reel 2L, 2C, stop switch 8L is operated to stop each rotation of the 2R, 8C, 8R are provided.

  The front door also displays a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in a big bonus, which will be described later, and an error code indicating the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Also, on the front door, 1 BET LED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set by 1 is lit, 2 BET LED 15 that notifies that the bet number is 2 is lit, and that 3 bets are set 3BETLED 16 to notify, the insertion request LED 17 to notify that the medal can be inserted by lighting, the start effective LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, and the weight (previous game) (Waiting for starting reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start) LED 19 during waiting to notify that it is on, LED 20 during replay notifying that it is in a replay game to be described later Is provided.

  Further, inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying that the betting number setting operation by the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. In the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R that indicate that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is effective are turned on. (See FIG. 3).

  In addition, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state excluding a RAM abnormality error and an abnormal winning error, which will be described later, and a stop state, which will be described later, is provided on the inner side of the front door. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time during the change of the value and the confirmation of the set value, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, which will be described later, provided in the housing A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the tank (not shown) side or the medal payout outlet 9 side, and a inserted medal sensor that detects a medal that has been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and has flowed down to the hopper tank side. 31 is provided.

  Inside the casing, a reel unit (not shown) comprising the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R, and the reel sensor 33 capable of detecting the respective reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A hopper tank (not shown) for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, a hopper motor 34 for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank from the medal payout opening 9, and paying out by driving the hopper motor 34. A payout sensor 35 for detecting a medal and a power supply box (not shown) are provided.

  On the front of the power supply box is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of a big bonus, which will be described later 36, a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and functioning as a reset switch for canceling an error state and a stop state excluding a RAM abnormal error and an abnormal winning error in the normal state, and in the setting change mode Is provided with a reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (outtake rate) of internal lottery to be described later, and a power switch 39 operated when turning on / off the power. Yes.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In the present embodiment, as the specified number of bets, three are determined in the normal gaming state described later, and two are determined in the regular bonus and challenge bonus described later. If medals are inserted beyond the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game. When the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. The Rukoto. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 100. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The power supply board 100 generates drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 100 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the. Further, the above-described hopper motor 34, payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply substrate 100.

  Connected to the game control board 40 are the above-described one-sheet BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, insertion medal sensor 31, and reel sensor 33. In addition, the above-described payout sensor 35, stop switch 36, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply substrate 100, and detection signals of these connected switches are input. It is like that.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 10, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 100. The hopper motor 34 is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 is composed of a microcomputer having a CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 for controlling the game, random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 65535 in this embodiment) are used. A random number generation circuit 42 for generating, a sampling circuit 43 for acquiring a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit 44 for detecting a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 100 , A motor driving circuit 45 that controls the driving of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid driving circuit 46 that controls the driving of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a driving control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power supply voltage supplied to the LED drive circuit 47 and the slot machine 1 to be monitored is monitored. An interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41 when a drop is detected. When the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the CPU 41a is not inputted, a reset signal is sent to the CPU 41a. A reset circuit 49 to be applied and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The CPU 41a is provided with a plurality of registers (storage areas) for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, A and F registers (flag registers) that mainly store calculation data, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers that store general-purpose data, and data indicating the position of the program being executed PC register to be stored, SP register to store a stack pointer (an address indicating the current position of a stack area to be described later), an R register to store data indicating a memory block of the RAM 41c performing a refresh operation to be described later, and the RAM 41c There are provided IX and IY registers for storing data indicating a reference position when referring to a storage area, and an I register for storing data indicating the position of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs.

  The CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, and executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  The main control unit 41 includes a signal input terminal DATA, and detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 are input to the input port via the signal input terminal DATA. The input states of these signal input terminals DATA are monitored by the CPU 41a, and the CPU 41a executes a basic process that shifts in stages according to the input states of the signal input terminals DATA, that is, the detection states of various switches.

  In addition, the CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In this embodiment, four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4 can be executed. For each interrupt, a counter mode (signal input from a trigger terminal CLK / TRG provided separately from the signal input terminal DATA) is provided. Can be selected and set between an interrupt mode that generates an external interrupt according to the number of times) and a timer mode (an interrupt mode that generates an internal interrupt according to the number of clock inputs of the CPU 41a).

  In the present embodiment, among the interrupts 1 to 4, interrupt 2 is set to the counter mode, interrupt 3 is set to the timer mode, and interrupts 1 and 4 are unused. The trigger terminal CLK / TRG is connected to the above-described power failure detection circuit 48, and the CPU 41a generates an interrupt 2 in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power failure detection circuit 48, and the power failure described later. Execute interrupt processing. The CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process to be described later by generating an interrupt 3 every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval. Moreover, although the interrupts 1 and 4 are set to unused, the interrupts 1 and 4 may generate | occur | produce by noise etc. For this reason, when interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the CPU 41a executes an unused interrupt process that immediately returns to the original process.

  The CPU 41a is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any one of interrupts 1 to 4, and a plurality of interrupts occurred simultaneously. In this case, interrupts to be executed with priority in the order of interrupts 2, 3, 1, 4 are set. In other words, when interrupt 2 and other interrupts occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 is prioritized and when interrupt 3 and interrupt 1 or 4 occur simultaneously, interrupt 3 is prioritized. To run.

  Further, the CPU 41a temporarily stores the data in use stored in the register in a later-described stack area provided in the RAM 41c at the start of interrupt processing based on the occurrence of any of the interrupts 1 to 4. And the data saved in the stack area at the end of the interrupt process is returned to the original register.

  As the RAM 41c, a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) is used, and a refresh operation is required to maintain the stored data contents. The CPU 41a is provided with the above-described R (refresh) register for performing this refresh operation. The R register consists of 8 bits, and the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b, and the value is updated every execution time of one instruction. .

  The main control unit 41 is also supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and while the backup power is being supplied, the CPU 41a performs a refresh operation to hold the data stored in the RAM 41c. It is like that.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value every time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, as will be described later, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. . The random number generation circuit 42 defines a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number. In this embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number (this function is hereinafter referred to as a hardware random number function). Random numbers for internal lottery, which will be described later, are not used as they are extracted by the hardware random number function, but are processed and used by software. Details thereof will be described in detail. The CPU 41a also has a function of updating the numerical value of the specific address in the RAM 41c by the above-described timer interrupt processing and acquiring the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function).

  The CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and a reel LED 55 disposed on the front door of the slot machine 1 are connected to the rendering control board 90. The components are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer having a CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and I / O port 91d. The effect control board 90 includes a sub control unit 91 for effect control and an effect control board 90. A liquid crystal driving circuit 92 that controls the driving of the connected liquid crystal display 51, a lamp driving circuit 93 that controls the driving of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a power source A reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the CPU 91a when it is turned on or when an initialization command is not input from the CPU 91a, and other circuits are mounted. The CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40. In addition to performing various controls for production, mounted on production control board 90 Directly or indirectly controls each unit of the control circuit.

  Similar to the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt. An interrupt terminal (not shown) of the sub-control unit 91 is connected to a strobe (INT) signal line that is output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command among command transmission lines. An interrupt is generated based on the input to acquire a command from the main control unit 41 and execute a command reception interrupt process to be stored in the buffer. Further, the CPU 91a executes a timer interrupt process (sub) by generating an interrupt every time the number of clock inputs reaches a certain number, that is, every certain time interval. Also, when an unused interrupt occurs in the CPU 91a, an unused interrupt process for immediately returning to the original process is executed.

  Further, unlike the CPU 41a, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal (INT), the CPU 91a interrupts the process even when an interrupt process based on another interrupt is being executed. The command reception interrupt process is executed at the top, and even if another interrupt occurs at the same time, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and while the backup power is supplied, the CPU 91a performs a refresh operation so that the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained. It has become.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value, and the winning probability of the internal lottery described later is determined according to the set value. Hereinafter, the setting value changing operation will be described.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 detects a voltage drop signal, a power interruption interrupt process is executed. In the power interruption interrupt processing, the register is saved in a stack of a RAM 41c, which will be described later, and data for destructive diagnosis (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1 in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, that is, other than 0 In addition to storing specific data, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, and stored in the RAM 41c. The RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of the corresponding area (all areas in this embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c is 1. In this case, the RAM parity adjustment data is 1.

  The CPU 41a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of activation, confirms the value of the destructive diagnosis data, the RAM parity is 0, and the destructive diagnosis On the condition that the data value is also correct, the processing state of the CPU 41a is restored to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c. If the data value is not correct, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and a RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  Further, the CPU 41a determines whether or not a setting value used for internal lottery in an internal lottery process to be described later is an appropriate value, and whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state. judge.

  Even when the set value used for the internal lottery is not an appropriate value, or when the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set and the RAM is set. The game is controlled to an abnormal error state and the progress of the game is disabled. As described above, unlike the other error states, the RAM abnormal error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new setting is made in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until a value is set.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are a regular bonus, a challenge bonus, and a normal gaming state as the gaming state. Among these, 2 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the regular bonus and the challenge bonus. 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state. For this reason, when the gaming state is a regular bonus or a challenge bonus, the game can be started when 2 is set as the bet number, and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 3 is set as the bet number. Then, the game can be started. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the specified number corresponding to the gaming state is If it is 2, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated when 2 is set as the bet number, and if the specified number according to the gaming state is 3, when 3 is set as the bet number All winning lines L1 to L5 are activated.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role.

  In the slot machine of this embodiment, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus are defined as special combinations, cherry and bell are defined as small combinations, and replay is defined as replay combination. Among these, in the regular bonus and challenge bonus game states, small roles such as cherry and bell are determined as winning roles. In the normal game state, special bonuses such as big bonus (1) and big bonus (2 ), A bonus, a replay as a re-playing role, a cherry as a small role, and a bell are defined as winning roles.

  Cherry is awarded when the symbol “Cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. A bell is awarded when a combination of “Bell-Bell-Bell” is placed on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 8 in the normal gaming state, 15 in the regular bonus and challenge bonus. Medals are paid out.

  Replay is awarded when a combination of “Replay-Replay-Replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, but with the regular bonus or the challenge bonus, even if this combination is arranged, the replay is not won. . When a replay is won, the medal will not be paid out, but the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game (regular bonus and challenge bonus will not be replayed, so be sure to This is substantially the same as when three medals corresponding to 3) are paid out.

  The big bonus (1) is won when a combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in the normal gaming state, and the big bonus (2) is “white” in the normal gaming state. When the combination of “7-white 7-white 7” is completed, a prize is awarded. When the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) wins, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the big bonus. Furthermore, at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, at the same time as the internal lottery described later, the transition to a regular bonus for winning a small role with a higher probability than in the normal gaming state. The regular bonus ends when 12 games are consumed, or when 8 games are won (any kind of combination is possible), whichever comes first. When the regular bonus ends, if the big bonus has not ended, the regular bonus is transferred again, and the regular bonus is repeatedly controlled until the big bonus ends. That is, during the big bonus, the regular bonus is always controlled. The big bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the big bonus exceeds 345. At this time, the regular bonus is ended regardless of whether the regular bonus end condition is satisfied. While the gaming state is in the big bonus, the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c while the regular bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  The challenge bonus is awarded when a combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” is prepared in the normal gaming state. When the challenge bonus is won, the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the challenge bonus. In the challenge bonus, the time from when the stop operation of the reel by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected until the corresponding reel stops, that is, the drawing range of the symbol is limited compared to the normal gaming state, but all small The winning combination of the combination is controlled to be uniformly allowed. The challenge bonus ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the challenge bonus exceeds 253. While the gaming state is in the challenge bonus, a challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c.

  It should be noted that the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the challenge bonus may be collectively referred to simply as “bonus”.

  In order for a winning combination of each combination determined according to the game state to occur, a special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) or a general combination storing in which the winning number of the corresponding combination is assigned to the RAM 41c by winning an internal lottery described later. Must be set to work (iwin_gen).

  FIG. 4A is a diagram showing the configuration of the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) assigned to the RAM 41c for storing the winning number of the special role won in the internal lottery. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) allocated to RAM41c in order to store the winning number of the general combination elected by lottery. In the following, there are ones that are described in decimal notation and ones that are described in hexadecimal notation, but those that simply indicate numerical values (for example, “10”) indicate decimal notation and numerical values. A character indicating H after the character (for example, “10H”) indicates a hexadecimal notation.

  The special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) is composed of 1 byte as shown in FIG. Of these, the winning number of the special role won is stored in the lower 4 bits, the upper 4 bits are unused, and 0H is always stored. Big bonus (1) when 01H is stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus), big bonus (2) when 02H is stored, and challenge bonus when 03H is stored Winning will be shown. If 00H is stored, it means that no special combination is won, that is, the special combination is lost.

  The general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is composed of 1 byte as shown in FIG. Of these, the winning combination number of the general combination is stored in the lower 4 bits, and the upper 4 bits are unused, and 0H is always stored. When 01H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen), it indicates cherry, when 02H is stored, bell, and when 03H is stored, it indicates the winning of replay. If 00H is stored, it means that no general combination has been won, that is, the general combination is lost.

  The winning number (including 00H) stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is updated based on the lottery result every time an internal lottery is performed, whereas the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) The winning number (including 00H) stored in is updated to the winning number of the winning special role when any special role is won in the internal lottery until the special role permitted by the winning number is available. The winning number is maintained and updated to 00H indicating a loss when the special combination permitted by the winning number is prepared.

  For this reason, the winning number of the general combination is valid only in the game in which the winning number is set, but the winning number of the special combination is valid until the combination permitted by the winning number is completed. That is, once the special combination winning number is set, even if the special combination permitted by the winning number cannot be arranged, the winning number is carried over to the next game.

  FIG. 5A is a diagram illustrating a combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to a lottery according to the winning combination table and the gaming state. The winning combination table is stored in the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 in advance, and the combination numbers (01H to 09H) assigned in the order in which the lottery is performed corresponding to the combination of combinations and combinations to be selected in the internal lottery. ), The winning numbers stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the general role storing work (iwin_gen) when the role and combination of the winning numbers are won are registered respectively.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, a role to be selected by lottery depending on whether the gaming state is a normal gaming state, a challenge bonus, or a regular bonus. And the combination of roles is different. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, whether any special role is being carried over (whether the winning number of any special role is already set in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus)) The combination of combinations and combinations that are subject to the lottery vary. In this embodiment, a state number corresponding to the gaming state is assigned, and when performing an internal lottery, a state number corresponding to the current gaming state is set, and a role to be a lottery object is determined according to this state number. It becomes possible to specify. Specifically, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, “0” is set as the state number, and when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, When the status number is set to “1” and the bonus is a challenge bonus, the status number is set to “2”, and when the bonus is a regular bonus, the status number is set to “3”. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the big bonus (1 ), Big Bonus (2), Challenge Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Challenge Bonus + Cherry, Replay, Bell, Cherry It becomes a target. When the game state is the normal game state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, the replay, bell, cherry, that is, the combination number 07H or later The combinations and combinations of combinations are subject to internal lottery. When the game state is a challenge bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, bells and cherries, that is, combinations of combinations and combinations after the combination number 08H are targeted for internal lottery. When the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “3” is set as the state number, bells and cherries, that is, combinations of combinations and combinations after the combination number 08H are targeted for internal lottery.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, as will be described later, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is acquired. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, according to the obtained random number for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and setting value Done. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game.

  Each combination and combination of combinations determined according to the game state is referred to in the order of combination numbers registered in the winning combination table shown in FIG.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and no special role is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “0”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination of the combination numbers 01H to 09H And combinations of combinations, that is, big bonus (1) [port number 01H], big bonus (2) [port number 02H], challenge bonus [port number 03H], big bonus (1) + cherry [port number 04H], big Bonus (2) + cherry [role number 05H], challenge bonus + cherry [role number 06H], replay [role role 07H], bell [role number 08H], cherry [role number 09H] as the target lottery in order Read out.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state and any special combination is carried over, that is, when the state number is set to “1”, the winning combination table is referred to and the combination number 07H˜ 09H combination and combination of combinations, that is, replay [port number 07H], bell [port number 08H], and cherry [port number 09H] are sequentially read out as the target combination of the internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a challenge bonus, that is, “2” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of the combinations of the combination numbers 08H to 09H, that is, the bell [port number 08H]. Cherry [combination number 09H] is sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  Further, when the game state is a regular bonus, that is, “3” is set as the state number, the winning combination table is referred to and combinations of combinations of the combination numbers 08H to 09H, that is, the bell [port number 08H]. Cherry [combination number 09H] is sequentially read out as a target combination for internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that is the subject of the internal lottery is sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the addition result overflows, It is judged that it was won.

  Then, when winning of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, the winning combination table is referred to and the winning number corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be winning is stored as a special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) And stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen).

  When the winning of the big bonus (1) is determined, 01H is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus), and 00H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When it is determined that the big bonus (2) is won, 02H is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) and 00H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When it is determined that the challenge bonus is won, 03H is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus), and 00H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When the winning of big bonus (1) + cherry is determined, 01H is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus), and 01H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When the winning of big bonus (2) + cherry is determined, 02H is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus), and 01H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When the winning of the challenge bonus (2) + cherry is determined, 03H is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus), and 01H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When it is determined that replay is won, 03H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). If the winning of the bell is determined, 02H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen). When the winning of the cherry is determined, 01H is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen).

  The number of determination values for each combination and combination of combinations is read according to the storage address of the number of determination values registered in the combination table stored in advance in the ROM of the main control unit 41.

  FIG. 5B is a diagram illustrating an example of the role-specific table. The number of determination values may be 256 or more, and cannot be stored in one byte. Therefore, each determination value number is registered using a storage area of two bytes. The number of determination values is registered in correspondence with the above-described state number that can specify the gaming state. This is because even if the combination is the same combination or combination, the winning probabilities may differ depending on the gaming state. The number of determination values may be common regardless of the set value, or may be different depending on the set value. If the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, a common flag is set (value is set to “1”).

  In the role-specific table, as shown in FIG. 5B, big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus (2) + cherry, challenge bonus + The storage addresses for the number of judgment values for cherry, replay, bell, and cherry are registered.

  Big Bonus (1), Big Bonus (2), Challenge Bonus, Big Bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Challenge Bonus + Cherry are not carried over any special role in the normal gaming state In this case, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to the state number 0 is registered. For these combinations and combinations of combinations, the common flag is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set values.

  Replay is a combination that is subject to internal lottery regardless of whether or not a special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and a storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to state numbers 0 and 1 is registered. The common flag for this combination is 1, and a common storage address for the number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  The bell is a role that is an object of the internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to the state numbers 0 and 1, the storage address of the judgment value number corresponding to the state number 2, and the state A storage address for the number of determination values corresponding to number 3 is registered. The common flag for this role varies depending on the state number. For state numbers 0, 1, and 2, the common flag is 0, and the storage address for the number of determination values is registered individually according to the set value. . Further, for the state number 3, the common flag is 1, and a storage address for the common number of determination values is registered regardless of the set value.

  Cherry is a role that is the subject of internal lottery in any gaming state, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to state number 0, the storage address of the number of determination values corresponding to state number 1, and the state number 2 And the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to the state number 3 are registered. The common flag for this combination differs depending on the state number. For state number 0 and state number 1, the common flag is 0, and the storage addresses for the number of determination values are individually registered according to the set value. Further, for the state number 2 and the state number 3, the common flag is 1, and the storage address of the common determination value number is registered regardless of the set value.

  Also, the number of medals to be paid out when winning each winning combination is registered in the role-specific table. Of course, only the cherries and bells, which are small roles, can be paid out for medals when winning a prize. Cherry and Bell can win in any game state, but for Bell, when the state number is 2 or 3, that is, when the game state is a challenge bonus or a regular bonus, the state number is 0. When it is 1, that is, more medals are paid out than when the gaming state is the normal gaming state.

  The big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), and the challenge bonus are accompanied by a transition of the gaming state and are not eligible for paying out medals. The replay does not involve the payout of medals, but it is substantially the same as the payout of 3 medals since it is not necessary to insert medals for setting the bet amount in the next game (always the normal game state).

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a storage area for the number of determination values acquired based on the addresses registered in the role-specific table. The storage area for the number of determination values is provided in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 in the development model, and in the address area allocated to the ROM 41b in the main control unit 41 in the mass production model.

  For example, the address ADD has an internal lottery with a big bonus (1) and a set value of 1 in the game state of [state number 0], that is, in the normal game state where no special combination is carried over. At this time, 50, which is the value stored here, is acquired as the number of determination values. Addresses ADD + 2, ADD + 4, ADD + 6, ADD + 8, and ADD + 10 are addresses that are referenced when the internal lottery target is the big bonus (1) and the set value is 2 to 6 in the gaming state of [state number 0]. It is. Addresses ADD + 12, ADD + 14, ADD + 16, ADD + 18, ADD + 20, and ADD + 22 are referred to when the target combination of the internal lottery is the big bonus (2) and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of [state number 0]. Address. Addresses ADD + 24, ADD + 26, ADD + 28, ADD + 30, ADD + 32, and ADD + 34 are addresses that are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a challenge bonus and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of [state number 0]. is there.

  In addition, addresses ADD + 36, ADD + 38, ADD + 40, ADD + 42, ADD + 44, and ADD + 46 have a big bonus (1) + cherry and a set value of 1-6 in the game state of [state number 0]. An address that is sometimes referred to. Addresses ADD + 48, ADD + 50, ADD + 52, ADD + 54, ADD + 56, and ADD + 58 are in the game state of [state number 0], when the target part of the internal lottery is big bonus (2) + cherry and the set value is 1-6 The address to be referenced. Addresses ADD + 60, ADD + 62, ADD + 64, ADD + 66, ADD + 58, and ADD + 70 are addresses that are referred to when the target part of the internal lottery is challenge bonus + cherry and the set value is 1 to 6, respectively.

  Big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big in the gaming state of [state number 0], that is, in the state where no special role is carried over in the normal gaming state For bonus (2) + cherry and challenge bonus + cherry, the number of judgment values is stored individually according to the set value, and a different number of judgment values is stored. The winning probabilities of the combinations will be different.

  The address ADD + 72 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when [State No. 0] and [State No. 1], that is, in the normal gaming state, when the target combination of the internal lottery is replay.

  Addresses ADD + 74, ADD + 76, ADD + 78, ADD + 80, ADD + 82, and ADD + 84 are in the gaming state of [State No. 0] and [State No. 1], that is, in the normal gaming state, and the set value is 1 It is an address that is referenced when .about.6. Addresses ADD + 86, ADD + 88, ADD + 90, ADD + 92, ADD + 94, and ADD + 96 are referred to when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell and the set value is 1 to 6 in the game state of [state number 2], ie, the challenge bonus Address. Regarding the bells in the gaming state of [state number 0], [state number 1], and [gaming state 2], the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, but the set values 1 to 4 Is stored with a common number of judgment values, and different judgment value numbers are stored in the setting value 5 and the setting value 6, so that the winning probability of the bells of the setting values 1 to 4 is the same. The winning probabilities for the set value 6 bell will be different.

  The address ADD + 98 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the target character of the internal lottery is a bell in the gaming state of [state number 3], that is, the regular bonus.

  Addresses ADD + 100, ADD + 102, ADD + 104, ADD + 106, ADD + 108, and ADD + 110 are in the game state of [state number 0], that is, in the state where no special combination is carried over in the normal game state, This address is referenced when the set value is 1-6. For the cherries in the gaming state of [state number 0], the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value, and a different number of determination values is stored. Therefore, the winning probability of the cherry is determined according to the set value. Will be different.

  Addresses ADD + 112, ADD + 114, ADD + 116, ADD + 118, ADD + 120, and ADD + 122 are stored in the state [1], that is, in a state where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, The address is referred to when the set value is 1-6. For the cherries in the gaming state of [state number 1], the number of determination values is individually stored according to the set value. However, since the same number of determination values is stored, the cherry is not stored at any setting value. The winning probabilities are the same.

  The address ADD + 124 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value in the game state of [state number 2], that is, in the challenge bonus, when the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry. The address ADD + 126 is an address that is referred to regardless of the set value when the target combination of the internal lottery is cherry in the gaming state of [state number 3], that is, the regular bonus.

  FIGS. 7A to 7D are diagrams illustrating an example of the relationship between the value of a random number for internal lottery, the number of determination values of each combination and combination of combinations, and winning. FIG. 7A shows a case where no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 7B shows a case where any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state. Fig. 7 (d) shows an example when the player is in the challenge bonus, and Fig. 7 (d) shows an example when the player is in the regular bonus. 7A to 7D show an example in which the set value is 6.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 7A, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), a challenge bonus, a big bonus (1) + Cherry, Big Bonus (2) + Cherry, Challenge Bonus + Cherry, Replay, Bell, Cherry are subject to internal lottery. In the set value 6, the number of judgment values for each combination is 58, 58, 64, 80, 80, 96, 8978, 9200, 256. First, the big bonus (1) subject to the internal lottery is determined by adding the judgment value number 58 and the result of addition overflows when 65478-65535 is acquired as a random number for the internal lottery. Become.

  Next, the big bonus (2) which is the subject of the internal lottery is obtained by adding 116 which is the sum of the judgment value number 58 of the big bonus (1) and the judgment value number 58 of the big bonus (2). When 65420 to 65477, which will overflow, is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, it is won. Similarly, the challenge bonus is a big bonus when 65356 to 65419 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and the big bonus (1) + cherry is a big bonus when 65276 to 65355 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. (2) + Cherry is obtained when 65196 to 65275 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and Challenge Bonus + Cherry is acquired when 65100 to 65195 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery. When 65099 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, Bell is when 46922-56121 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, and Cherry is when 46666-46921 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery Each is determined to be a winner. When 0 to 46665 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  The approximate winning probability of each combination and combination of combinations calculated based on the number of judgment values is the big bonus (1), big bonus (2), challenge bonus, big bonus (1) + cherry, big bonus ( 2) For each of + Cherry, Challenge Bonus + Cherry, Replay, Bell, Cherry, 1 / 1129.9, 1 / 1129.9, 1/1024, 1 / 819.2, 1 / 819.2, 1/682 .7, 1 / 7.3, 1 / 7.1, 1/256.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, only replay, bell, and cherry are subject to internal lottery. Since the number of determination values for each combination is 8978, 9200, and 512, when 56558 to 65535, 47358 to 56557, and 46846 to 47357 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, they are determined to be winning. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 7.3, 1 / 7.1, and 1/128. When 0 to 46845 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), in the challenge bonus, only bell and cherry are subject to internal lottery, and at the set value 6, the number of determination values for each combination is 9200 and 512, so 56336 When -65535 and 55824-56335 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that each is a win. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities for each combination are 1 / 7.1 and 1/128. When 0 to 55823 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, all the combinations are lost.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7D, in the regular bonus, only bell and cherry are subject to internal lottery, and at the set value 6, the number of determination values of each combination is 65,522 and 513. When -65535 and 1-513 are acquired as random numbers for internal lottery, it is determined that each is a win. In addition, the approximate winning probabilities of the respective roles are 1 / 1.008 and 1 / 1127.8. When 0 is acquired as a random number for internal lottery, all combinations are lost.

  Next, acquisition of random numbers for internal lottery will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The random numbers for the internal lottery are acquired by extracting random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 by the hardware random number function and processing them by software by the CPU 41a. Note that the least significant bit of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 or the processed random number is called the 0th bit, and the most significant bit is called the 15th bit.

  FIG. 8A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the random number generation circuit 42 in detail. As shown in the figure, the random number generation circuit 42 includes a pulse generation circuit 42a, a lower counter 42b, and an upper counter 42c. The lower counter 42b and the upper counter 42c are both 8-bit (1 byte) counters, the lower counter 42b is the 0th to 7th bits, and the upper counter 42c is a total of 16 bits from the 8th to 15th bits. The data signal is output.

  The pulse generation circuit 42a outputs a pulse signal at a frequency that is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a and is not an integral multiple thereof (preferably relatively prime). The pulse signal output from the pulse generation circuit 42a is clocked into the lower counter 42b.

  The lower counter 42b alternately inverts the 0th bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a pulse signal is input from the pulse generation circuit 42a. Assuming that positive logic is applied, a logical value of H level corresponds to 1 and a logical value of L level corresponds to 0. In the case of negative logic, a logic value of 1 may be read as L level, and a logic value of 0 may be read as H level. When the level of the 0th bit data signal is inverted from H level to L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the 0th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the level of the 1st bit data signal is changed to H level. Inverted alternately with L level.

  Similarly, when the level of the (m−1) th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, that is, whenever the logic value of the (m−1) th bit data signal changes from 1 to 0, the mth bit data The signal level is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. The carry signal is output every time the level of the seventh bit data signal changes from H level, that is, the logical value of the seventh bit data signal changes from 1 to 0. The carry signal output from the lower counter 42b is clocked into the upper counter 42c.

  The upper counter 42c alternately inverts the eighth bit data signal between the H level and the L level every time a carry signal is input from the lower counter 42b. Each time the level of the eighth bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the ninth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level. Similarly, every time the level of the m−1th bit data signal is inverted from the H level to the L level, the level of the mth bit data signal is alternately inverted between the H level and the L level.

  The logic value of a 16-bit data signal in which the data signal of the lower counter 42b is the lower 8 bits and the data signal of the upper counter 42c is the upper 8 bits is 0 (0000H) every time the pulse generation circuit 42a outputs the pulse signal. ) → 1 (0001H) → 2 (0002H) →... → 65535 (FFFFH) The values are updated so as to be continuous every update, and the maximum value 65535 (FFFFH) is next to the initial value 0 (0000H). The value circulates and is output from the random number generation circuit 42.

  The sampling circuit 43 includes a latch circuit, and latches and latches a 16-bit data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 at that time based on a sampling command (when the start switch 7 is operated) from the CPU 41a. Output the data signal. The CPU 41a extracts numerical data corresponding to the data signal input from the sampling circuit 43 via the I / O port 41d as a random number generated by the random number generation circuit. In the following description, the data signal output from the random number generation circuit 42 is described as a random number corresponding to the logical value.

  FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. The random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the HL register which is a 16-bit general-purpose register included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the general-purpose register 41GR, the CPU 41a uses the A register for calculation to calculate the lower byte of the HL register (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) and the upper byte. The value (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c) is exchanged.

  The CPU 41a uses the value stored in the HL register at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values for each combination.

  Note that interrupts to the CPU 41a are prohibited from the extraction of random numbers from the random number generation circuit 42 to the end of processing. This is to prevent the contents of the HL register from being rewritten in the interrupt processing routine when an interrupt occurs to the CPU 41a.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  After completion of the internal lottery, the CPU 41a sets the index data (start address) of the stop control data stored in the ROM 41b, and when the reel starts rotating, the reel stops and is still rotating. Is left, the stop control table is created for each rotating reel with reference to the stop control data specified from the index data (start address) set after the end of the internal lottery. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the referred stop control table is drawn. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  The stop control data used in this embodiment is composed of 15 types of stop control data used in a gaming state other than the challenge bonus and one type of stop control data used in the challenge bonus. These 16 types of stop control data. Is stored in the ROM 41b.

  In this embodiment, the result of the internal lottery, that is, the winning number (00H to 03H) of the special role stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the winning of the general role stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen). There are 16 combinations with numbers (00H to 03H), and in the ROM 41b, 16 types of stop control data used in the gaming state other than the challenge bonus can be specified corresponding to each of these internal lottery results. In addition to storing index data (head address), index data (head address) of one type of stop control data used in the challenge bonus is stored.

  Specifically, the winning number for special roles: 0, the winning number for general roles: 0 (both special and general roles are lost), the winning number for special roles: 0, the winning number for general roles: 1 (special role is lost cherry) , Special Role Winning Number: 0, General Role Winning Number: 2 (Special Role Losing Bell), Special Role Winning Number: 0, General Role Winning Number: 3 (Special Role Losing Replay), Special Role Winning number: 1, General role winning number: 0 (Big Bonus (1), general role losing), Special Role winning number: 1, General role winning number: 1 (Big Bonus (1), Cherry), Special Winning number for roles: 1, Winning number for general roles: 2 (Big Bonus (1) / Bell), Winning number for special roles: 1, Winning number for General roles: 3 (Big Bonus (1) / Replay), Special Winning number for roles: 2, Winning number for general roles: 0 (Big Bonus (2) ・ 1 Special role winning number: 2, General role winning number: 1 (Big Bonus (2) / Cherry), Special Role winning number: 2, General Role winning number: 2 (Big Bonus (2)・ Bell), Special Role Winning Number: 2, General Role Winning Number: 3 (Big Bonus (2) Replay), Special Role Winning Number: 3, General Role Winning Number: 0 (Challenge Bonus / General Role) Loss), special role winning number: 3, general role winning number: 1 (challenge bonus cherry), special role winning number: 3, general role winning number: 2 (challenge bonus bell), special role winning number Index data (start address) of stop control data is stored corresponding to the winning number: 3 and the general winning number: 3 (challenge bonus / replay), and the stop for challenge bonus is stored. Index data of the control data (head address) is stored. Special role winning number: 1, General role winning number: 3 (Big Bonus (1) Replay), Special role winning number: 2, General Role winning number: 3 (Big Bonus (2) Replay) ) Stores index data (first address) for specifying the same stop control data. In these cases, the same stop control data is specified.

  In a gaming state other than the challenge bonus, stop control data specified from index data (start address) corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is selected, and in the challenge bonus, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, the challenge Stop control data specified from index data (start address) of bonus stop control data is selected, and reel stop control is performed based on the selected stop control data.

  The stop control data is composed of drawn-in frame number data indicating the number of drawn-in frames corresponding to the stop operation position and the address of drawn-in frame number data to be referred to in accordance with the reel stop status.

  The number-of-drawing frame data referenced according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, or left Depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and in the situation where any one of the reels is stopped, Since it may differ depending on the stop position of the stopped reel, the address of the number of frames to be drawn to be referred to is registered for each rotating reel for each situation, and is based on the start address of the stop control data. Thus, it is possible to specify the address of the number of frames data to be referred to according to each situation. It has to be able to identify the frame number data. Even if the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, the same address is registered as the address of the number of drawn frames when the same number of drawn frames is applied. In such a case, the same data for the number of drawn frames is referred to.

  The drawn frame number data is data that can specify the number of drawn frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. 21 areas (frames) divided every 8 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel. These areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel, so symbols 1 to 21 are assigned to each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. The number of drawn frames by area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule in the number of drawn frames data so that the number of drawn frames by area number can be acquired by expanding the number of drawn frames data. It has become.

  In the stop control table created by referring to the stop control data as described above, the area corresponding to each area number corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the lower reference position (in this embodiment, the lower symbol of the perspective window 3). The number of frames to be drawn when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (position where the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number). It is a set table.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, after the end of the internal lottery, the start address of stop control data corresponding to the result is set. At the start of reel rotation, stop control data is specified based on the start address set after the internal lottery, and the number of frames to be drawn for each reel corresponding to the state in which all reels are rotating from the specified stop control data Are acquired, the drawing frame number data of each reel stored in the acquired address is expanded, and a stop control table is created for all the reels.

  When any one reel is stopped or any two reels are stopped, stop control data is specified based on the head address set after the internal lottery and stopped from the specified stop control data. The address of the number of frames drawn in the non-stop reel corresponding to the area number of the reel and the stop position of the reel is acquired, and the number of frames drawn in the reel stored in the acquired address is expanded to show the unstopped reel Create a stop control table for the reels.

  Next, when the CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control for deriving the display result to the corresponding reel will be described. If any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is detected effectively, the area number of the stop operation position is based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. And the number of drawn frames corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of drawn frames until it is stopped is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. Thereby, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of frames to be drawn from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  Further, in this embodiment, there is only one type of stop control data corresponding to one internal lottery result (combination of a winning number for a special role and a winning number for a general role) in one gaming state. In this stop control data, only one address is stored as the address of the storage area for the number of drawn frame data corresponding to the stop status of one reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel). That is, stop control data corresponding to one internal lottery result in one gaming state, and number-of-drawing frame data corresponding to the stop status of the reel (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to these is also unique for one internal lottery result in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). For this reason, when all of the gaming state, the internal lottery result, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reels are based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of drawn frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of four symbols after detecting a stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In addition, in the stop control data used when any of the winning combinations is won, the number of drawn frames is determined so that the winning combination is drawn in as much as possible within the range of 4 frames, and the winning combination is not arranged. In the stop control data used when none of the winning combinations is won, the number of frames to be drawn in is determined so that none of the winning combinations are arranged. Therefore, if any winning combination is won, there will be a stop control table in which the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames and the number of drawing frames to be drawn is set so that the winning combination is not aligned. The reel stop control is performed, and if no winning combination is selected, a stop control table is created in which the number of frames to be drawn that does not have any winning combination is determined, and the reel stop control is performed. Done. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed to align them and stop. The symbol of the winning combination will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  In addition, in the stop control data used when both the special role and the small role are elected, the number of frames to be drawn is determined so as to draw the elected special role to the maximum in the range of 4 frames, With regard to the stop operation position where the selected special combination cannot be drawn within the range of up to four frames, the number of drawn-in frames is determined so that the selected small combination is drawn up to the maximum within the range of four frames. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the symbols of the special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames can be aligned and stopped on the winning line, the control is performed to align and stop them. If you can't draw a special role that you have won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, you can align the symbols of the small role that has been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If they can be stopped, control is performed to stop them together, and the symbol of the winning combination is controlled to be stopped in the drawing range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn.

  In addition, in the stop control data used when both the special combination and the re-playing combination are elected, the number of drawn-in frames is determined so as to draw the re-playing combination to the maximum in the range of 4 tops. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. As will be described later, “replay” which is a symbol constituting the re-gamer is arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames for each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. Can be stopped at any position within the pull-in range, so if both the special role and the re-gamer are elected, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player , You will always win the re-playing role together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the “bell” and “replay” are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for all of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It can be stopped at any position within the range. That is, when only the bell and the replay are elected, the winning combination can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player.

  In addition, for the stop control data used when the gaming state is the challenge bonus, the symbols ("cherry" or "bell") constituting the combination of cherry or bell for the left reel are drawn to the maximum within the range of one frame. The number of frames to be drawn is determined as described above, and the number of frames to be drawn is determined so that the symbols constituting the combination of bells ("bells") are drawn to the maximum in the range of four frames for the right and middle reels. As a result, when the left reel is operated to stop, the symbols constituting the combination of cherries or bells are stopped on the winning line within a maximum of two frames, and the middle and right reels are operated to stop. Is performed, the control that aligns and stops the symbols constituting the combination of the bells in the drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line is performed. As shown in FIG. 2, the symbol “cherry” that constitutes the cherry on the left reel and the symbol “bell” that constitutes the bell are arranged at intervals within two symbols. Will always stop the “Cherry” or “Bell” symbol on any winning line. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, “bells”, which are the symbols constituting the bell in the middle reel and the right reel, are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within an interval of 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since it can always be stopped at any position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, during the challenge bonus, on the condition that the left reel is stopped first, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player Regardless of the operation timing, a cherry or a bell, that is, one of the small roles will always be awarded.

  Next, the storage status of the stop control data in the ROM 41b will be described.

  In the ROM 41b of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, an area for storing index data for specifying stop control data (hereinafter referred to as an index area) and an area for storing stop control data are stored. (Hereinafter referred to as a data area). Note that the start address of the index area is [1000H], which is also expressed as ctrldata_index.

  As described above, 16 types of stop control data are stored in the data area.

  In the index area, the start address (index data) of each of the 16 types of stop control data stored in the data area is stored in the storage area to which the addresses [1000H] +0 to 33 are assigned. Yes.

  Here, the index data will be described. For example, when the first address of the area storing the first type of stop control data is [1022H] and the end address is [1041H], [1022H] is one type. It is stored in the index area as the index data of the eye. When the start address of the area storing the second type of stop control data is [1042H] and the end address is [104AH], [1042H] is the index data of the second type of stop control data. Is stored in the index area. Similarly, the start addresses of a total of 16 types of stop control data are stored in the index area as index data. The index data of the stop control data is used as an index (index) when referring to each stop control data individually.

  Next, the storage order of 16 types of stop control data in the index area will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, after storing the start addresses of 16 pieces of stop control data corresponding to 16 combinations that can be taken by the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role, The start address of one piece of stop control data corresponding to the bonus is stored.

  Then, in the storage order of 16 index data corresponding to 16 combinations that can be taken by the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role, first, the winning number of the special role is 0, Four stop addresses of the stop control data corresponding to the four types of combinations when the numbers are 0, 1, 2, and 3 are stored in the order of combinations with the smaller winning numbers of general roles. Thereafter, similarly, when the winning numbers of the special roles are 1, 2, and 3, the stop control data corresponding to the four types of combinations when the winning numbers of the general roles are 0, 1, 2, and 3, respectively. 16 start addresses are stored, 4 in total.

  In the ROM 41b, the number of bits required to express an address is 16 (2 bytes), and the storage capacity per address is 8 bits (1 byte). Therefore, the head address of the stop control data, for example, [1022H] is divided into upper 10 bits [10H] and lower 8 bits [22H] and stored in two consecutive addresses. ing. At this time, the upper 8 bits are stored in the storage area corresponding to the address next to the address where the lower 8 bits are stored. That is, an address (for example, 1001H) obtained by adding 1 to an address (for example, 1000H) in which the lower 8 bits (for example, 22H) are stored is an address in which the upper 8 bits (for example, 10H) are stored. . Therefore, index data is stored in the index area for each address that increases by +2 from [1000H].

  FIGS. 10 and 11 are diagrams showing the processing flow until the CPU 41a selects the stop control data for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, focusing on the change in the register value.

  It should be noted that at the time of starting execution of the processing, it is assumed that the winning number of the general combination (value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen)) is stored in the B register.

  First, when the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, the value of the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus), that is, the winning number of the special combination is stored in the A register. Furthermore, [4 × special winning number] is stored in the A register by adding the A registers two times in succession. Then, the winning number of the general combination which is the value of the B register is added to the A register. As a result, [4 × special combination winning number + general winning combination number] is stored in the A register.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a challenge bonus, a value of INDEX_CB is stored in the A register. INDEX_CB is 2 by subtracting [ctrldata_index (= 1000H)], which is the start address of the index area, from the start address [1020H] of the storage area of the start address of the stop control data used during the challenge bonus included in the index area The divided value, that is, INDEX_CB is [(1020H−1000H) / 2 = 10H = 16].

  After setting the value of the A register, the head address [ctrldata_index (= 1000H)] of the index area in the ROM 41b is stored in the HL register.

  Then, the A register is added twice to the lower 8 bits of the HL register. As a result, when the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, [ctrldata_index + 2 × (4 × special winning number + general winning number)] is stored in the HL register. When the gaming state is a challenge bonus, [ctrldata_index + 2 × 16] is stored in the HL register. It should be noted that, when the mathematical expression in the case of the challenge bonus is modified, [1020H] is obtained.

  This [ctrldata_index + 2 x (4 x special role winning number + general role winning number)] is the internal lottery result (combination of the special role winning number and the general role winning number) in cases other than during the challenge bonus. This is the address of the storage area for storing the lower 8 bits of the start address of the corresponding stop control data. For example, when the winning number of the special role is 1 {Big Bonus (1)} and the winning number of the general role is 2 (bell), [ctrldata_index + 2 × (4 × winning number of special role + winning number of general role) ] Is [ctrldata_index (= 1000H) +12] = [100CH]. As shown in FIG. 9, the address [100CH] of the ROM 41b stores the lower 8 bits [C4H] of the top address of the stop control data when the big bonus (1) is won and when the bell is won.

  The address stored in the HL register is either [ctrldata_index + 2 × (4 × winning number for special role + winning number for general role)] (other than the challenge bonus) or [1020H] (during the challenge bonus) [Lower 8 bits of the top address of the stop control data] stored in the ROM 41b in association with the A is stored in the A register.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the HL register, and the address stored in the HL register is [ctrldata_index + 2 × (4 × special winning number + general winning number) +1] (except during the challenge bonus), or [ 1021H] (during the challenge bonus), [the upper 8 bits of the top address of the stop control data] stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the H register.

  Further, by storing the [lower 8 bits of the start address of the stop control data] stored in the A register in the L register, the [start address of the stop control data (including the upper and lower positions)] is stored in the HL register. Will be stored. Then, the value of the HL register is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr).

  As described above, when the challenge bonus is not in effect, if the start address of any of the 16 stop control data corresponding to the internal lottery results is in the challenge bonus, the challenge bonus stop control data Is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game state is other than the challenge bonus, the value stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) indicating the result of the internal lottery (the winning number of the special combination) and the general combination storing work ( It corresponds to the result of the internal lottery by performing the calculation [ctrldata_index + 2 x (4 x winning number for special role + winning number for general role)] using the value stored in iwin_gen) (winning number for general role) Identifies the address of the storage area that stores the start address of stop control data to be stored, and stores the specified storage address in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr) so that the stop control data can be obtained It has become.

  In addition, when the gaming state is a challenge bonus, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, it is stored at the end of the index area using INDEX_CB, that is, a value for specifying the stop control data for the challenge bonus. The stop control data can be obtained by specifying the start address of the stop control data for the challenge bonus and storing the specified storage address in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr). When it is determined that the gaming state is a challenge bonus, the challenge bonus described in the program is not used to specify the storage address of the stop control data for the challenge bonus by performing an operation using INDEX_CB. The stop control data may be acquired by storing the storage address of the stop control data for use in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr).

  Next, the abnormal winning determination in the present embodiment will be described.

  When all the reels are stopped and the CPU 41a has any winning combination on the winning line, the CPU 41a determines whether the winning combination is an allowable winning combination in the game. Make a decision. When a combination that is not permitted in the game is arranged on the winning line, the game is controlled to an abnormal winning error state to disable the progress of the game. Unlike the other error states, the abnormal winning error state is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. It will not be released until

  The abnormal winning determination will be described. First, the CPU 41a sets an internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and sets an internal winning flag indicating a winning combination permitted in the game after the end of the internal lottery. A winning symbol flag is set to indicate the winning combination on the winning line when the reels stop. Then, an abnormal winning determination flag is created from the internal winning flag, and it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the generated abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag.

  The internal winning flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, and the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 1. , It indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and when it is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the challenge bonus, the 6th bit corresponds to the replay, and the 14th bit. The bit corresponds to bell and the 15th bit corresponds to cherry. The third to fifth and seventh to thirteenth bits do not correspond to any combination.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of combinations may be allowed in one game. In this case, the value of all the bits corresponding to these combinations is set to 1 in the internal winning flag. ing. In particular, the internal winning flag [C000H] in which both the 14th bit (Bell) and the 15th bit (Cherry) are set to 1 indicates that winning of all small roles (Bell, Cherry) is permitted. This is an internal winning flag and is referred to as an all winning combination winning flag.

  The abnormal winning determination flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating a winning combination permitted in the game, but the bit value individually determined for each winning combination is 0. In some cases, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted, and in the case of 1, it indicates that the winning of the combination is not permitted. That is, the abnormal winning determination flag is a value obtained by inverting 0 and 1 of the internal winning flag.

  The winning symbol flag is a 16-bit (2 byte) binary value indicating the winning combination on the winning line, and when the value of the bit individually determined for each winning is 1, Indicates that a winning has been won, and when it is 0, it indicates that the winning combination has not won. The winning symbol flag is the same as the internal winning flag. As shown in FIG. 12A, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), and the 3rd bit corresponds to the challenge bonus. The 6th bit corresponds to replay, the 14th bit corresponds to the bell, and the 15th bit corresponds to cherry. The third to fifth and seventh to thirteenth bits do not correspond to any combination. By comparing the winning symbol flag and the internal winning flag, the CPU 41a performs an abnormal winning determination.

  Then, the CPU 41a determines whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred by performing an AND operation on the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag. In the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination allowed in the game is 0, and when this winning combination is won, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1. However, even if no winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning design flag is 0, the result of the logical product operation is always 0. On the other hand, of the abnormal winning determination flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the combination that is not permitted in the game is 1, and when this combination does not win, that is, the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 0. In this case, the result of the logical product operation is 0, but when the winning is made, that is, when the value of the corresponding bit of the winning symbol flag is 1, the result of the logical product operation is 1. For this reason, if even one unacceptable winning combination wins, the result of the logical product operation of the abnormal winning determination flag and the winning symbol flag becomes a value other than 0. In this case, the abnormal winning is determined. Will be.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram showing the flow of processing until the CPU 41a determines an abnormal prize paying attention to the change in the register value.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, at the start of processing execution, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the H register, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag are stored in the L register, and the B register. , It is assumed that the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, first, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag stored in the L register are stored in the A register. Further, all bits of the A register are inverted, and a logical product (AND) of the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag stored in the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register. To do. As a result, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the A register.

  This [all-bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] is when the winning specified by the winning symbol is a winning permitted by the internal winning flag [00H], otherwise, it is a value other than [00H] and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 12B, among the lower 8 bits, the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning}, and the 0th bit of the winning symbol is 1 {Big Bonus (1 ) Winning}, [all bit inversion value of internal winning flag (lower 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 01H] is [00H]. On the other hand, when the 0th bit of the internal winning flag is 1 {Big Bonus (1) Winning} and the 3rd bit of the winning symbol is 1 {Challenge Bonus Winning}, all of the [Internal Winning Flag (Lower 8 bits)] Bit inversion value AND winning symbol flag (lower 8 bits)] = [FEH AND 04H] is 04H, and it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  Similarly, by using the H register and the C register, for the upper 8 bits, the [all bit inversion value of the internal winning flag (upper 8 bits) AND winning symbol flag (upper 8 bits)] is calculated and the result is calculated. Store in A register. When the A register is other than [00H], it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  That is, the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag are divided into upper 8 bits and lower 8 bits and the abnormal winning determination process is performed.

  Next, conversion from the result of the internal lottery to the internal winning flag will be described.

  After the completion of the internal lottery, the CPU 41a wins each of the special combination winning number and the general combination winning number indicating the result based on the number / flag conversion table stored in the ROM 41b in advance. It is converted into a 16-bit binary value in which 1 is set to the value of the bit corresponding to the combination. If the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, the converted value is logically ORed with 0000H, and the result is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag. Also, if the gaming state is a challenge bonus, the logical value is ORed for all the small role winning flags in which C000H, that is, the bit value corresponding to cherry and bell is set to 1 in the converted value, and the result is an internal winning Store in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as a flag.

  Thus, after converting the result of the internal lottery into a 16-bit binary value based on the number / flag conversion table, if the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, the logical value is logically ORed with 0000H. While the result is set as an internal winning flag, if the gaming state is a challenge bonus, C000H (all small role winning flag) is logically ORed to the converted value, and the result is set as the internal winning flag. If the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, an internal winning flag is set to allow the winning combination by the internal lottery, and if the gaming state is the challenge bonus, all the games are uniformly distributed regardless of the result of the internal lottery. An internal winning flag indicating that a small combination is permitted is set.

  Here, the storage status of the number / flag conversion table in the ROM 41b will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, a number / flag conversion table for general roles and a number / flag conversion table for special roles are provided. The head address of the general combination number / flag conversion table area is [2000H], which is also expressed as iwflag_table_g. The leading address of the special combination number / flag conversion table area is [2008H], which is also expressed as iwflag_table_b.

  In the number / flag conversion table for general roles, the winning numbers for general roles take four types of values, so the four internal winning flags corresponding to the winning numbers for each general role are the winning numbers for general roles. Are stored in ascending order, that is, in the order of 0, 1, 2, and 3. Also, in the special role number / flag conversion table, the winning numbers for special roles take four types of values, so that four internal winning flags corresponding to the winning numbers for each special role are displayed for special roles. The winning numbers are stored in ascending order, that is, in the order of 0, 1, 2, and 3.

  The ROM 41b has a storage capacity per address of 8 bits (1 byte). Therefore, the internal winning flag expressed in 16 bits, in particular, the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number of the general role is, for example, [8000H] indicating that the cherry is won internally, and the upper 8 bits [80H]. ] And [00H], which are the lower 8 bits, are stored in two consecutive addresses. At this time, the upper 8 bits are stored in the storage area corresponding to the address next to the address where the lower 8 bits are stored. That is, an address (for example, 2003H) obtained by adding 1 to an address (for example, 2002H) in which the lower 8 bits (for example, 00H) are stored is an address in which the upper 8 bits (for example, 80H) are stored. .

  On the other hand, in the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number of the special role, the upper 8 bits are always [00H], and 1 is set only in the 0th to 2nd bits included in the lower 8 bits. Is stored.

  That is, in the number / flag conversion table for general roles, the four internal winning flags corresponding to the winning numbers for general roles are listed in ascending order of the winning numbers for general roles, that is, in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3, Two addresses (2 bytes) are stored. Also, in the special role number / flag conversion table, the four internal winning flags corresponding to the winning numbers of the special roles are listed in ascending order of the winning numbers of the special roles, that is, in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3. One address (one byte) is stored.

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are diagrams showing the processing flow until the CPU 41a converts the winning number into the internal winning flag, paying attention to the change in the register value.

  At the start of processing, the C register is cleared (00H is stored) when it is not during the challenge bonus, and in the case of the challenge bonus, all small roles ( It is assumed that the upper 8 bits [C0H] of all the small role winning flags indicating that the winning of “Bell, Cherry” is permitted are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the value (general winning number) of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is first stored in the A register. Further, by adding the A registers, [2 × general winning number] is stored in the A register. Then, the lower 8 bits of the leading address [iwflag_table_g (= 2000H)] of the general number / flag conversion table area in the ROM 41b are added to the A register. As a result, [00H + 2 × general combination winning number] is stored in the A register.

  After setting the value of the A register, the value of the A register is stored in the L register, and the upper 8 bits [20H] of the top address [iwflag_table_g (= 2000H)] of the general-use number / flag conversion table area are stored in the H register. To store. As a result, [iwflag_table_g + 2 × general combination winning number] is stored in the HL register.

  This [iwflag_table_g + 2 × winning number of general combination] is an address to a storage area for storing the lower 8 bits of the winning flag of the general combination corresponding to the winning number of the general combination. For example, when the winning number for the general combination is 2 (bell), [iwflag_table_g + 2 × the winning number for the general combination] is [iwflag_table_g (= 2000H) +4] = [2004H]. As shown in FIG. 13, the address [2004H] of the ROM 41b stores the lower 8 bits [00H] of the internal winning flag when the bell is won.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15, the value of the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) (the winning number of the special combination) is stored in the A register. Then, the lower 8 bits of the leading address [iwflag_table_b (= 2008H)] of the special number / flag conversion table area in the ROM 41b are added to the A register. As a result, [08H + special winning number] is stored in the A register.

  Here, [iwflag_table_g + 2 × general winning number] stored in the HL register is stored (saved) in the stack area.

  Then, the value of the A register is stored in the L register, and the upper 8 bits [20H] of the head address [iwflag_table_b (= 2008H)] of the special number / flag conversion table area are stored in the H register. As a result, [iwflag_table_b + special winning number] is stored in the HL register.

  This [iwflag_table_b + special winning number] is the address of the ROM 41b that stores the lower 8 bits of the special winning flag corresponding to the special winning number. For example, when the winning number for the special role is 1 {Big Bonus (1)}, [iwflag_table_b + the winning number for the special role] is [iwflag_table_b (= 2008H) +1] = [2009H]. As shown in FIG. 13, the address [2009H] of the ROM 41b stores the lower 8 bits [01H] of the internal winning flag of the big bonus (1).

  The CPU 41a storing the address in the HL register stores [the lower 8 bits of the winning flag for the special role] stored in the ROM 41b in association with the stored address [iwflag_table_b + the winning number for the special role] in the A register. .

  Here, [iwflag_table_g + 2 × winning number of general combination] stored in the stack area is stored (returned) in the HL register.

  The logical sum of the [lower 8 bits of the winning flag of the general role] stored in the ROM 41b in association with [iwflag_table_g + 2 × the winning number of the general role] that is the address stored in the HL register and the value of the A register ( OR) and store the result in the A register. As a result, [Winning flag for special role (lower 8 bits) OR Winning flag for general role (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the A register.

  After that, 1 is added to the HL register, and [iwflag_table_g + 2 × general winning number + 1] corresponding to the address stored in the HL register is stored in the ROM 41b [the upper 8 bits of the winning flag of the general winning ] Are stored in the H register.

  Also, the value of the A register, [the winning flag for special role (lower 8 bits) OR the winning flag for general role (lower 8 bits)] is stored in the L register.

  Further, the value of the H register is stored in the A register, and the value stored in the C register is [00H] (other than during the challenge bonus) or [C0H] (during the challenge bonus), which is the value of the A register. The logical sum (OR) with [the upper 8 bits of the winning flag of the general role] is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register.

  Finally, by storing the value of the A register in the H register, the “internal winning flag (including upper and lower levels)” is stored in the HL register. Then, the value of the HL register is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag.

  As described above, the internal winning flag indicating the combination permitted by the game is set. When the game state is other than the challenge bonus, [00H OR general role winning flag (upper 8 bits), special role winning flag (lower 8 bits) OR general winning flag ( [Lower 8 bits)] is in the challenge bonus, [C0H OR general role winning flag (upper 8 bits), special role winning flag (lower 8 bits) OR general winning flag as internal winning flags (Lower 8 bits)] is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag), so that an internal winning flag that allows winnings of all small roles (Bell, Cherry) is set when the challenge bonus is in effect. It has become so.

  If the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, the process of performing a logical sum operation on 0000H on the converted value may be omitted. Also, when it is determined that the gaming state is a challenge bonus, based on the number / flag conversion table, it is converted to a 16-bit binary value in which the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1. In the case where it is determined that the gaming state is a challenge bonus, instead of storing the value obtained by performing a logical sum operation of C000H (all small part winning flags) on the converted value in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag), C000H (all small part winning flags) described in the program may be directly stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag.

  Next, error control associated with medal payout will be described. The CPU 41a performs control for driving out the hopper motor 34 and paying out medals in accordance with the occurrence of the small role winning and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the bet amount). At this time, if medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are clogged, the driving of the hopper motor 34 is stopped, and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time despite the hopper motor 34 being driven, the hopper motor 34 is stopped once and the hopper motor 34 is restarted several times. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even after the trial, it is determined as a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper), and the progress of the game is stopped by controlling to an error state. The error states associated with these medal jamming errors and hopper errors are canceled by operating the reset switch 23 and the reset / setting switch 38, and control for paying out the remaining medals is performed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 has a storage area of 512 bytes. As shown in FIG. 16, addresses 7E00 (H) to 7FFF (H) are assigned to each byte, and important work , General work, special work, set value work, unsaved work, unused area, stack area.

  The important work is an area of 40 bytes from 7E00 (H) to 7E27 (H), and it is a big bonus such as various display and LED display data, I / O port 41d input / output data, game time counter, etc. This work stores data that is inconvenient if it is initialized at the end.

  The general work is a 178-byte area of 7E28 (H) to 7E8E (H), 7EBA (H) to 7F04 (H), stop symbol data, number of medals to be paid out, winning combination flag, medal in big bonus This work stores data that can be initialized at the end of the big bonus, such as the total number of payouts.

  The special work is a 39-byte area from 7E8F (H) to 7EB5 (H), and data for transmitting commands to the effect control board 90, various software random numbers, etc., are initialized only before the start of setting. The work to be stored.

  The set value work is a 1-byte area of 7EB6 (H) and is a work in which the set value is stored. After 0 is stored in the initialization before the setting is started (before the transition to the setting change mode), It is corrected to 1, and the set value newly set at the end of the setting (at the end of the setting change mode) is stored.

  The unsaved work is a 3-byte area of 7EB7 (H) to 7EB9 (H), and is a work that holds the state of various switches as the state of the stop switch 36. The data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of startup. A value is always set regardless of whether it is present or not.

  The unused area is a 205-byte area from 7F05 (H) to 7FD1 (H) and is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later is satisfied. Then it will be initialized.

  The stack area is a 46-byte area from 7FD2 (H) to 7FFF (H), and the area from 7FD2 (H) to stack pointer-1 is an unused stack area in the stack area. The area of the stack pointer to 7FFF (H) is an in-use stack area in which data saved from the register of the CPU 41a is stored. Of these, the unused stack area is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later is satisfied, as in the case of the unused area. Therefore, it is not initialized.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 does not destroy the data in the RAM 41c before the start of setting (before the transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, or at the time of activation. At the time, when four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initializations with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is an initialization that is performed before the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the use of the storage area of the RAM 41c is used. All areas except the middle stack area (including unused areas and unused stack areas) are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the big bonus. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is initialization that is performed when the setting key switch 37 is in an OFF state at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The used stack area is initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In the ROM 41b, the start address of the area to be initialized and the initialization size indicating the size of the area to be initialized are registered corresponding to each of initializations 1 to 4, and when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c. Refers to the initialization table, acquires the start address and initialization size corresponding to any of initializations 1 to 4 according to the initialization condition, sets a pointer to the start address, and sets the initialization size . If the initialization size includes the size of the unused stack area, the size of the unused stack area (stack pointer-7FD2 (H)) is calculated and the initialization size is set. Then, the area of the address corresponding to each byte from the initialization address where the pointer is set is cleared to 0, and each time the byte is cleared, the initialization size is decremented by 1 and the pointer is advanced by 1. Run until zero. That is, when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c, it does not initialize each area according to the initialization condition, but initializes an area of a specified size from a specified address.

  FIG. 17B shows an initialization table. In the initialization table, the start address and the initialization size are registered corresponding to the initializations 1 to 4 as described above.

  In initialization 1, 7E00 (H) is registered as the start address, and 1D3 (H) + M (size of unused stack area: (stack pointer−7FD2)) bytes are registered as the initialization size. 7E00 (H) to 1D3 (H) + M bytes are initialized. Then, as shown in FIG. 16, important work, general work, special work, set value work, unsaved work, general work, unused area, and unused stack area are allocated to address areas that are continuous from 7E00 (H). The sum of the sizes of these areas is 1D3 (H) + M bytes. Therefore, in initialization 1, 7D00 (H) is initialized to 1D3 (H) + M bytes, so that These areas are initialized in the order of general work, special work, set value work, non-saved work, general work, unused area, and unused stack area.

  In initialization 2, two start addresses and initialization sizes for each address are registered. This is because the general work initialized in the initialization 2 is allocated to two separate address areas. In initialization 2, 7E28 (H) is registered as the start address of the area to be initialized first, 67 (H) bytes are registered as the initialization size, and 7EB7 (H) is set as the start address of the area to be initialized next. Since 119 (H) + M bytes are registered as the conversion sizes, in initialization 2, an area for 7E28 (H) to 67 (H) bytes and an area for 7EB7 (H) to 119 (H) + M bytes Is initialized. The size of the general workpieces 7E28 (H) to 7E8E (H) is 67 (H) bytes. As shown in FIG. 16, the remaining general workpiece area, unused area, and unused stack area are 7EB7 ( H) are allocated to consecutive address areas, and the total size of these areas is 119 (H) + M bytes. Therefore, in initialization 2, 7E28 (H) to 67 (H) bytes are initialized, By initializing 7EB7 (H) to 119 (H) + M bytes, these areas are initialized in the order of general work, unused area, and unused stack area.

  Also in the initialization 3, two start addresses and initialization sizes for each address are registered. This is because the non-saved work initialized in the initialization 3 and the unused area and the unused stack area are allocated to two separate address areas. In initialization 3, 7EB7 (H) is registered as the start address of the area to be initialized first, 3 (H) bytes are registered as the initialization size, and 7F05 (H) is set as the start address of the area to be initialized next. Since CE (H) + M bytes are respectively registered as the conversion size, in initialization 3, an area from 7EB7 (H) to 3 (H) bytes and an area from 7F05 (H) to CE (H) + M bytes Is initialized. As shown in FIG. 16, the unsaved work is an area for 3 bytes from 7EB7 (H), and the unused area and the unused stack area are allocated to address areas that are continuous from 7F05 (H). Since the sum of the sizes of these areas is CE (H) + M bytes, in initialization 3, 7EB7 (H) to 3 (H) bytes are initialized, and 7F05 (H) to CE (H) + M bytes. When the minutes are initialized, these areas are initialized in the order of the non-saved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area.

  In initialization 4, 7F05 (H) is registered as the start address, and CE (H) + M bytes are registered as the initialization size. Therefore, in initialization 4, an area from 7F05 (H) to CE (H) + M bytes is registered. Is initialized. As shown in FIG. 16, the unused area and the unused stack area are allocated to address areas that are continuous from 7F05 (H), and the total size of these areas is CE (H) + M bytes. Therefore, in initialization 4, the CE (H) + M bytes from 7F05 (H) are initialized, so that these areas are initialized in the order of the unused area and the unused stack area. .

  In addition, initializations 1 and 3 among initializations 1 to 4 are processes performed after the CPU 41a is started and before an interrupt is permitted. On the other hand, the initializations 2 and 4 are processes performed in a state where interrupts are permitted, but interrupts are prohibited during the execution of these initializations 2 and 4. That is, interrupts are always prohibited during the initializations 1-4.

  In this embodiment, to initialize the storage area of the RAM 41c is to clear the data in the target area to 0, that is, to update the value of the target area to 0. The area data may be rewritten to a predetermined initial value.

  Next, an external output signal output from the slot machine 1 to an external device will be described. The CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 receives an RB medium signal indicating that the regular bonus is being performed, a BB medium signal indicating that the big bonus is being performed, a CB signal indicating that the challenge bonus is being performed, and a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet amount. Then, output control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals paid out as a result of winning a prize as an external output signal. The game control board 40 can be connected to an external device via an external output board (not shown), and the external output signal output by the output control of the CPU 41a is connected to the external output board (not shown). Output to an external device.

  Here, the output status of the RB signal and the BB signal when the big bonus occurs will be described. When a big bonus occurs, the CPU 41a first starts outputting a BB signal (from OFF to ON). Next, during the big bonus that starts the output of the RB signal with the occurrence of the regular bonus (from OFF to ON), the transition to the regular bonus is repeated until the end condition is satisfied, so it is always controlled to the regular bonus. However, once the regular bonus ends and the next regular bonus starts, the CPU 41a stops outputting the RB signal indicating the occurrence of the regular bonus to end (from ON to OFF). ), When the output waiting time tw elapses, the output is started again (from OFF to ON). When the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied and the regular bonus ends with this, the output of the RB signal is stopped (from the ON state to the OFF state), and then the output of the BB signal is also stopped (ON) To OFF state).

  Thus, when the regular bonus ends during the big bonus and the regular bonus starts again, the output of the RB signal is stopped for the output waiting time tw, and then the output is started again. It is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by the external device that has input the RB signal. Note that the output waiting time tw may be a time longer than the level at which it is possible to determine that the signal has been interrupted by the external device.

  Next, commands that the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 makes a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a command, a standby command, an abort command, an error command, a setting start command, and an initialization command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number. When a medal is inserted, the one-BET switch 5 or the MAX BET switch 6 is operated to set the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. And is transmitted each time stop control of each reel is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The gaming state command is a command that can specify the gaming state of the next game (whether it is a normal gaming state, a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.), and is transmitted at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and is transmitted when the transition to the standby state is made after a certain time has elapsed without setting the bet amount after the end of one game.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The setting start command is a command indicating the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting is started, that is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  Each of these commands is generated in an activation process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in a special work in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When the CPU 91a of the sub control unit 91 receives a command transmitted by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, the CPU 91a refers to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b, and displays the liquid crystal display based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. The various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are controlled.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the CPU 91a receives a command, the CPU 91a receives among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table. The control device corresponding to the type of the command is referred to, and the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the CPU 91a receives a new command during the execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and performs control corresponding to the newly received command. An effect based on the pattern is executed. In other words, even when the effect has not been completed to the end, when a new command is received, the effect that has been executed is canceled and the effect based on the new command is executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, the CPU 91a is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  In the control pattern table, specific commands (payout start command, payout end, gaming state command indicating big bonus end, standby command, stop command, error command, setting start command, initialization command, etc.) are received. When a specific control pattern to be referred to is stored, and the CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the CPU 91a does not control the specific control corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game. With reference to the pattern, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern.

  When a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a winning is received, a winning effect pattern for executing a winning effect according to the type of winning is referred to as a control pattern. In particular, when a winning determination command indicating the occurrence of a big bonus winning is received, a BB winning pattern for executing a BB winning effect peculiar to the big bonus winning is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a payout start command is received, a payout pattern for outputting payout sound effects is referred to as a control pattern. Further, when a payout end command is received during the output of the payout sound effect, the output of the payout sound effect is stopped. When a payout start command is received, unlike the other commands, the effect that is being executed is not executed and the effect corresponding to the received command is not executed. Sound effects are output. That is, other effects and effects accompanying payout are executed in parallel.

  When a gaming state command indicating the end of the big bonus is received, an ending pattern for executing an ending effect indicating the end of the big bonus is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a standby pattern for executing a standby effect is referred to as a control pattern.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the standby effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning. As will be described later, the above-mentioned BB winning effect and ending effect are in the progress stage where the effect is dynamically executed and the state when the progress stage ends (for example, the final screen on the liquid crystal display 51). Is continuously displayed and the final stage sound effect is repeatedly output), and the BB winning effect and ending effect reach the final stage when an error occurs. In such a case, when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect and the ending effect are not executed from the elapsed stage, but return to the final stage.

  When the setting start command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the initialization command is received, the above-described standby pattern is referred to as the control pattern. That is, when the initialization command is received, the standby effect is executed.

  The CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 performs RAM parity adjustment so that the RAM parity based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0 each time the timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed is executed. Data is calculated and stored in the RAM 91c.

  Then, the CPU 91a calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 91c at the time of activation, and is based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is designed to return to the production state before the interruption. Specifically, the control pattern executed last is referred to and control based on the control pattern is executed. As a result, an effect based on the control pattern executed before power interruption is executed from the beginning. If the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage at the time of power interruption, the BB winning effect or ending effect is not executed from the elapsed stage at the next start-up, but the final stage state. It will return to. Further, when the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all areas of the RAM 91c at the time of startup is not 0 (in the case of 1), it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized. It has become.

  Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the setting of bets and the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting bets) and effects. 18 to 27 are timing charts showing a period during which the setting of the bet number is allowed and a period during which the credit settlement is allowed.

  As shown in FIG. 18, while the game is not being executed, setting of the bet number and credit settlement are permitted, and in this state, a medal is inserted or the bet number is set using the credit. Settings are controlled to be possible. If a bet number can be set and a prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state is not set, the bet number is incremented by one each time a medal is detected. Further, if a prescribed number of bets corresponding to the gaming state is set, a credit is added by one each time a medal is detected. When the credit reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the insertion of the medal is prohibited. . If the credits remain, the number of bets is set according to these switches by operating the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6, and the amount is subtracted from the credits. Further, if the credits remain or the bet number is set, the operation of the settlement switch 10 is used to set the medal and the bet amount stored as credits by driving the hopper motor 34. The given amount of medals is paid out and returned to the player, and credits and bets are subtracted according to the medals paid out.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are permitted, and the game is started, the setting of the bet amount and the credit settlement are prohibited at that time. Specifically, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, the flow path of the inserted medal is switched to the medal payout exit 9 side, and the operation of the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the settlement switch 10 is invalidated. The time when the game is started is not the time when the rotation of the reel is started, but the time when the control stage is shifted by operating the start switch 7. This is because although a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, there is a case where a weight is applied. At this point, the game starts as a control stage although the reel rotation is on standby.

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the display result is derived, it is determined that the game has ended, and when the end of the game is determined, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of credit settlement are lifted, and the setting of the bet amount and credit settlement are permitted. It becomes a state. As an exception, when a replay win occurs, the bet number is automatically set, so the setting of the bet number by the player's operation remains prohibited. In this state, Credit settlement is also prohibited.

  As a result of stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, if a winning with a medal payout has occurred, display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R as shown in FIG. At the time, the end of the game is not determined, and when the medal payout accompanying the occurrence of the winning is completed, the end of the game is determined, and at that time, the setting of the bet amount and the prohibition of the credit settlement are canceled, and the bet Number setting and credit settlement are permitted.

  Also, if the big bonus winning is generated as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R being stopped, as shown in FIG. 20, when the display results are derived for all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, Is determined to be completed, and the CPU 91a executes the BB winning effect. The stage at the BB winning stage is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage. First, when the stage shifts to the stage where the dynamic stage is executed over the stage time of the stage at the BB winning stage, the stage is completed. The process moves to the final stage where the state continues. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and this elapsed time is set longer than the period until the above-mentioned BB winning effect is reached at the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the time effect stage waiting time is reached, and the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the stage waiting time for the BB winning effect. Thus, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect at the time of power interruption, and at the next start-up, the BB winning effect effect is based on the backed up counter value. Since the waiting time is restarted, the time (Tb period in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the interruption from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect is restored when the interruption is restored. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a power interruption occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. Is done. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a power interruption occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, a flag indicating that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, or a BB winning effect) (Elapsed time since the execution of BB) is backed up, and at the next activation, it is backed up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, indicates that the BB winning effect has reached the final stage) When the flag is set or when the time elapsed since the execution of the BB winning effect has reached the final stage), the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and the BB winning effect is performed. If the fact that is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect will return to the final stage. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 23, for example, in a period until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred is determined. If a payment error occurs during the payment of credits and a payout error occurs during the payment of the medal associated with the payment, the time elapsed since the end of the game is determined to be an error. Resume from the state of time. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the production waiting time of the BB winning effect even during the error occurrence, and after canceling the error, the BB winning effect based on the maintained counter value. When the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) is removed when the payout error is canceled. When the period of (medium Td) elapses, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in an elapsed stage. It is executed from the beginning. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the BB winning effect has reached the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the BB winning effect is at the final stage as in the case of power interruption. It returns in the state of. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data only on whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It will return in the state of. Regardless of whether the BB winning effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time. Thus, an effect corresponding to the BET command is executed.

  In addition, in the game during the big bonus, as a result of the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being stopped, the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, some wins occur and the total number of payouts during the big bonus exceeds 345 If the game is a stop game and the stop function is not set, as shown in FIG. 20, the end of the game is determined at the end of the medal payout, and the CPU 91a executes the ending effect. . The ending effect is composed of an elapsed stage and a final stage, as in the case of the BB winning effect. First, a transition is made to an elapsed stage in which a dynamic effect is executed over the effect time of the ending effect. When is finished, the process proceeds to the final stage where the state is continued. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. The setting of the number of bets remains prohibited until the waiting time is reached, and the number of bets is set when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. The prohibition is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41 a reaches the ending effect stage waiting time after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. In other words, the main control unit 41 backs up the counter value for timing the ending effect production waiting time at the time of power interruption, and at the next activation, measures the ending effect production waiting time based on the counter value that is backed up. Therefore, when power is restored, the bet is made when the time (Tb in the figure) excluding the time (Ta period in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed. The prohibition of the setting of the number is released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, when a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. In other words, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage (for example, after the flag or ending effect indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is executed). (Elapsed time) is backed up, and the next time it is activated, it is backed up that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage (for example, when the flag indicating that the ending effect has reached the final stage is set, or the ending effect) If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is It will return in the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, in the period until the elapsed time measured by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, the main control unit 41 maintains the counter value for timing the ending effect stage waiting time even during the occurrence of an error, and after the error is released, the ending effect stage waiting time is based on the maintained counter value. Therefore, when the payout error is canceled, the time (Td period in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tc in the figure) from the production waiting time of the ending effect is released. When the time has elapsed, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is canceled and the setting of the betting number is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. That is, the sub-control unit 91 maintains only data indicating whether the ending effect being executed is in the elapsed stage or the final stage when the error occurs, and when the error is canceled, the data indicating that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage If the ending effect is maintained, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage, and if the data indicating that the ending effect is in the final stage is maintained, the ending effect returns to the final stage state. Regardless of whether the ending effect is in the progress stage or the final stage, when the bet number is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the BET command An effect corresponding to is performed.

  Further, if the big bonus end condition is satisfied and the stop function is set, as shown in FIG. 24, the end of the game is determined when the medal payout ends. The above-mentioned ending effect is executed by the CPU 91a. On the other hand, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined by the CPU 41a is timed, and the elapsed time is set longer than the period until the ending effect reaches the final stage. Since the stop state is controlled when the waiting time is reached, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated even when the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined reaches the rendering waiting time of the ending effect. Until the bet is set, the setting of the bet number remains prohibited. When the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the setting of the bet number is also released. The bet number setting is permitted. On the other hand, with regard to credit settlement, the prohibition is lifted when the end of the game is determined, and credit settlement is permitted from that point.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time until the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a reaches the effect waiting time for the ending effect. If a power interruption occurs at, and then returns, the elapsed time from the time when the end of the game is determined is restarted from the state of power interruption. That is, at the time of restoration of power interruption, after a time (period Tf in the figure) excluding time (period Te in the figure) that has already passed before the power interruption from the waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or reset / When the setting switch 38 is operated and the stop state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, when a power interruption occurs in a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26, when a power interruption occurs at a stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect returns to the final stage. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined, the elapsed time counted by the CPU 41a is until the BB winning stage effect waiting time is reached. For example, if a credit checkout is performed and a payout error occurs during the payout of medals accompanying this checkout, and the payout error is canceled, the elapsed time from when the end of the game is determined is counted. Resume from the state when the error occurred. That is, when the payout error is canceled, after the time (time period Tg in the figure) excluding the time already passed before the occurrence of the payout error (period Tg in the figure) from the rendering waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the bet number setting prohibition is also released, and the bet number setting is permitted.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, when a payout error occurs in the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. The On the other hand, although not particularly shown, when a payout error occurs at the stage after the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect returns to the final stage as in the case of power interruption. To do. Regardless of whether the ending effect is an elapsed stage or a final stage, when a stop state occurs and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is Will be canceled and notification during stoppage will be executed. When the stop state is released in this state and a stop command indicating that is received from the main control unit 41 side, the stop notification is stopped and the standby effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, the end condition of the big bonus is that the total number of payouts in the big bonus exceeds 345. Therefore, in the game where the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied, the medals must be paid out. When the payout ends, the end of the game is determined. For example, when applying that the big bonus reaches the specified number of games as an end condition, in the game where the end condition of the big bonus is satisfied In some cases, medals are not paid out. In such a case, the end of the game is determined when the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  When the reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the CPU 41a performs the startup process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Since the reset signal is a signal output when the power is turned on and when the operation of the main control unit 41 is stagnant, the activation process is performed when the CPU 41a is activated when the power is turned on and when the CPU 41a is activated due to a malfunction. This is a process to be performed.

  In the start-up process, first, the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. are initialized (Sa1), then the voltage drop signal detection data is acquired from the input port, and whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. That is, it is determined whether or not the voltage is stable (Sa2), and if the voltage drop signal is input, any processing is performed except for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal is input. There is no loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sa2 that the voltage drop signal is not input, the values of the I register and IY register are initialized (Sa3), the state of the stop switch 36 is acquired, and a specific register of the CPU 41a is acquired. The valid / invalid of the stop function is set in (Sa4). By the initialization of the I register and the IY register, the address of the interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and the reference address for referring to the storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa5), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state (Sa6). If the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state in step Sa6, the RAM parity of all storage areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa7). Is determined (Sa8). If the power interruption interrupt processing is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sa8, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. An error code indicating abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in step Sa8, it is further determined whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal (Sa9). If power interruption interrupt processing is performed normally, the data for destruction diagnosis should be set. If the data for destruction diagnosis is not normal in step Sa9 (the data for destruction diagnosis is stored at the time of power interruption. In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, so an error code indicating a RAM abnormality is set in the register (Sa10), and the process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG.

  In the error processing, as shown in FIG. 29, the current display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is saved in the stack (Sb1), and the error code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sb2). .

  Next, the error code stored in the register is checked, and it is determined whether or not the error code is an error code indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error (Sb3), indicating a RAM abnormal error or an abnormal winning error. In the case of an error code indicating an error code, after performing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sb4), no processing is performed. Transition to loop processing.

  If it is determined in step Sb3 that the error code is not an error other than a RAM error or an abnormal winning error, it is determined whether an operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sb5). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, it is further determined whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected (Sb6). If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sb4. Return. That is, the game waits in a state where the progress of the game is impossible until the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is detected.

  When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step Sb5 or when the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step Sb6, the error code stored in the register is cleared (Sb7 ), The display state of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the display state saved in the stack in the step Sb1 (Sb8), and the process returns to the original process.

  As described above, in the error processing, if the error processing is other than the RAM abnormal error and the abnormal winning error, the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated, so that the error processing is canceled. The error state is not canceled even if the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23 is operated in the case of error processing due to a RAM abnormality error or an abnormal winning error.

  Returning to FIG. 28, if it is determined in step Sa9 that the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal, so the unsaved work, the unused area, and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are initialized. After performing initialization 3 (Sa11), the destruction diagnosis data is cleared (Sa12). Next, each register is restored to the state before the power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa13), the interrupt is permitted (Sa14), and the process that was executed last before the power interruption is returned.

  If the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state in the step of Sa6, after executing initialization 1 for initializing all storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 41c except the used stack area (Sa15), The value (0 at this time) stored in the set value work is corrected to 1 (Sa16). Next, interruption is permitted (Sa17), and the setting change process shown in FIG. 30, that is, the setting change mode is entered (Sa18). After the setting change process is completed, the game process is entered.

  In the setting change process, as shown in FIG. 30, the setting value stored in the setting value work of the RAM 41c (the value of the setting value work is corrected to 1 before shifting to the setting changing process. Is read out (Sc1).

  Thereafter, the operation waits for detection of the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 (Sc2, Sc3). When the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sc2, the setting value read in the step of Sc1. 1 is added (Sc4), and it is determined whether or not the set value after addition is 7, that is, whether or not the settable range is exceeded (Sc5). If the set value after addition is not 7, After returning to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3 again, if the setting value after addition is 7 in the step Sc5, the setting value is corrected to 1 (Sc6). ), The process returns to the detection waiting state for the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in the steps Sc2 and Sc3.

  When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in the step of Sc3, the changed set value selected at that time is stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c and the set value is confirmed (Sc7). Wait until the setting key switch 37 is turned off (Sc8). If it is determined in step Sc8 that the setting key switch 37 is OFF, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. 28 and the process proceeds to the game process.

  As described above, in the startup process, when the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is stored in the RAM 41c by determining whether or not the RAM parity is 0 and whether or not the destructive diagnosis data is normal. It is determined whether or not the stored data is normal. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, the process proceeds to an abnormal error process. In the error processing due to the RAM abnormal error, an error code indicating the RAM abnormal error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is performed, so that the progress of the game is disabled. If the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, interrupts are not permitted. Therefore, once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM error, the setting key switch 37 is activated and interrupts are permitted. Until it is interrupted, no power interruption processing is performed even if the power is interrupted. That is, the RAM adjustment data is not calculated and stored so that the RAM parity is newly set to 0 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the destruction diagnosis data is not newly set. Even if the game is started, the game cannot be resumed even if the CPU 41a is restarted except when the setting key switch 37 is turned on.

  Once the process shifts to error processing due to a RAM abnormality error, the setting key switch 37 is activated in the ON state, and after all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, a setting change process is performed. The game cannot be progressed until a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. In other words, in the state where the error processing due to the RAM abnormality error is started, the state in which the game cannot be progressed is canceled and the game is resumed on the condition that a new set value is selected and set by operating the reset / setting switch 38. It becomes possible to make it.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a stop control data selection process (Sd3), a winning flag storage process (Sd4), a reel rotation process (Sd5), a winning determination process (Sd6), a payout The process (Sd7) and the game end process (Sd8) are executed in order, and when the game end process ends, the process returns to the BET process again.

  In the BET process in the step of Sd1, the process waits in a state where a bet number can be set, and a process for starting a game when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state and the start switch 7 is operated is executed. .

  In the internal lottery process in step Sd2, a random number for internal lottery is extracted simultaneously with the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in step Sd1, and the winning of each above-described combination is permitted based on the extracted random number value. Process to determine whether or not.

  In the stop control data selection process in step Sd3, a process for selecting stop control data used for the reel stop control of the game is performed based on the result of the internal lottery in step Sd2.

  In the winning flag setting process in the step of Sd4, a process of setting an internal winning flag indicating an allowable combination in the game is performed based on the result of the internal lottery in the step of Sd2.

  In the reel rotation process in step Sd5, the process of rotating each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R by the player is detected. A process for stopping the rotation is executed.

  In the winning determination process in step Sd6, when it is determined in step Sd5 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has been stopped, a winning is determined according to the display result derived for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. A process of determining whether or not it has occurred is executed. In the winning determination process, an abnormal winning determination is also performed.

  In the payout process in step Sd7, when it is determined in step Sd6 that a winning has occurred, processing such as addition of credits and payout of medals is performed based on the number of payouts according to the win.

  In the game end process in the step of Sd8, a process for setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  32 and 33 are flowcharts showing the control content of the BET process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd1.

  In the BET process, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the betting number is stored in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se1), and the specified number according to the gaming state (the specified number of betting numbers determined according to the gaming state. In the regular bonus, 1 is set. In the normal gaming state, 3 is set.) Is set in the RAM 41c (Se2), and a replay game flag indicating that the game is a replay game is set in the RAM 41c. Whether or not the game is a replay game is determined based on whether or not it is played (Se3).

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is a replay game, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (Se4), the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is It is determined whether or not the number is a prescribed number (Se5), and if the value of the BET counter is not the prescribed number, the process returns to the step of Se4. The RAM 41c is set (Se6), and the process proceeds to the Se8 step.

  If it is determined in step Se3 that the game is not a replay game, settings before waiting to be made are performed (Se7), and the process proceeds to step Se8. In the setting before waiting for input, the input disable flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared, and the detection of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the settlement switch 10 is validated.

  In step Se8, it is determined whether or not a medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion prohibition flag is set in the RAM 41c. When it is determined in step Se8 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path as a path on the hopper tank side. If it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to the off state, and the medal flow path is the path on the medal payout exit 9 side. As a result, the insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se10), and the process proceeds to Step Se11.

  In step Se11, it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensor 31 has detected passage of the inserted medal. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in the step of Se11, the process proceeds to the step of Se18. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the insertion of the medal is performed based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is possible to enter the token (Se12). If the medal cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to Step Se18.

  If the medal can be inserted in the step of Se12, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to determine whether or not the value of the BET counter is the prescribed number (Se13). If the value is not the specified number, 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se14), and the process returns to the Se8 step.

  If the value of the BET counter is a prescribed number in the step of Se13, 1 is added to the value of the credit counter in which the credit value is stored in the RAM 41c (Se15), and whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50 which is the upper limit value. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c (Se17), and the process returns to the step of Se8. .

  In step Se18, it is determined whether an operation of the start switch 7 is detected. If the operation of the start switch 7 is not detected in the step of Se18, the process proceeds to the step of Se22. If the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se19).

  If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number in the step of Se19, the process returns to the step of Se8, and if the value of the BET counter is a specified number, the input impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c and the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off. The state is set, a medal flow path is used as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and insertion of a new medal is prohibited (Se20), and a setting at the start of the game is performed (Se21). In the setting at the start of the game, detection of operations of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, and the checkout switch 10 is invalidated. Then, after the step of Se21, the BET process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. Along with this, setting of bets based on the insertion of medals, detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is prohibited, and the adjustment of credits based on the detection of the operation of the adjustment switch 10 is prohibited. It becomes. Note that the insertion impossible flag is not cleared until the BET process of the next game, and the detection of the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is not cleared until the BET process of the next game. The bet number setting is prohibited until the BET process. In addition, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not cleared until the next game BET processing except when the big bonus is won or the big bonus is ended. (Including medals used for setting) are prohibited. When the big bonus is won or the big bonus is over, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is effective when the game is finished (when the reel is stopped or when the medal payout is finished) without waiting for the BET process of the next game. Credits can be settled.

  In the step of Se22, it is determined whether or not an operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in the step of Se22, the process proceeds to the step of Se27, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the prescribed number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is a specified number (Se23). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se23, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se24). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se24, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se25), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se26), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  In step Se27, it is determined whether or not an operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not detected in the step of Se27, the process proceeds to the step of Se32, and if the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is detected, the specified number of bets set in the RAM 41c is referred to, and the BET counter It is determined whether or not the value is a specified number (Se28). If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in the step of Se28, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 (Se29). If the counter value is 0, the process returns to the Se8 step. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Se29, 1 is subtracted from the value of the credit counter (Se30), 1 is added to the value of the BET counter (Se31), and the process returns to the step of Se28.

  In the step of Se32, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in the step of Se32, the process returns to the step of Se8. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the operation is based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the game is a replay game (Se33). If the game is a replay game, the process returns to step Se8. If the game is not a replay game in the step of Se33, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Se34). If the value of the BET counter is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Se36, and the value of the BET counter is 0. Otherwise, a bet amount settlement flag indicating that the already set bet amount is to be settled is set in the RAM 41c (Se35), and the process proceeds to the step of Se36. In step Se36, the hopper motor 34 is driven to pay out medals corresponding to the value stored in the credit counter or BET counter, that is, medals stored as credits or medals used for setting the number of bets. Checkout process is performed to control the return. Then, after the settlement process in the step of Se36, the input impossible flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se37), and the process returns to the step of Se8.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the settlement process executed by the CPU 41a.

  In the settlement process, first, it is determined whether or not the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled based on whether or not the bet amount settlement flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sf1).

  If the medal used for setting the bet amount in the step of Sf1 is not settled, it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf2). If the value of the credit counter is 0, the settlement process is terminated. Then, the process returns to the original process.

  If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in the step of Sf2, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side. Insertion is prohibited (Sf3), and one medal payout process for performing payout control of one medal is performed (Sf4).

  In the medal payout process in step Sf4, if the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is not on, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to on. Then, the detection state of the payout sensor 35 is monitored, and when the payout sensor 35 detects the payout of one medal, it is determined that the medal is paid out, and the process proceeds to the next process. Further, when medals are continuously detected by the payout sensor 35 for a predetermined time or more, it is determined that the medals are jammed, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off, and an error code indicating a medal jammed error is set in the register. Then, the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. If no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 for a certain period of time, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is once turned off, and no medal is detected by the payout sensor 35 even if the driving of the hopper motor 34 is retried several times. In this case, after an error code indicating a hopper error (an error indicating a lack of medals in the hopper) is set in the register, the process proceeds to the error process shown in FIG. The error processing due to the medal jamming error or the hopper error is canceled by operating the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38, and after the cancellation, the processing returns to the top of the single medal payout processing.

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf4, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 (Sf5), and it is determined whether the value of the credit counter is 0 (Sf6). If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in step Sf6, the process returns to step Sf4. If the value of the credit counter is 0, the driving state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the driving is stopped. Later (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  If it is the settlement of medals used for setting the number of bets in the step of Sf1, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM 41c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set to the medal payout exit. As a route on the 9th side, the insertion of medals is prohibited (Sf3), and the same medal payout process as in step Sf4 is performed (Sf9).

  When one medal is paid out by the medal payout process in step Sf9, the value of the BET counter is decremented by 1 (Sf10), and it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (Sf11). If the value of the BET counter is not 0 in the step of Sf11, the process returns to the step of Sf9. If the value of the BET counter is 0, the betting number settlement flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sf12). After the drive state of the hopper motor 34 is set to off and the drive is stopped (Sf7), the settlement process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd2.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a prescribed number that is a predetermined number of medals inserted according to the game state of the game is specified (Sg1), and the process proceeds to step Sg2. The prescribed number is 3 in the normal gaming state, and 2 in the gaming state of the challenge bonus and the regular bonus.

  In step Sg2, it is confirmed whether or not the number of inserted medals is the specified number specified in step Sg1, and if it is the specified number, Y is determined and the process proceeds to step Sg3. If it is not the prescribed number, it is determined as N and the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In the step of Sg3, it is confirmed whether or not the set value stored in the set value work of the RAM 41c is in the range of 1 to 6. If the set value is in the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to the step of Sg5. When it is not in the range of 1 to 6, it is determined as N and the process proceeds to step Sg4.

  In step Sg4, since it is confirmed that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, an error code indicating RAM abnormality is stored in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  In step Sg5, random number acquisition processing is performed. In this random number acquisition process, as shown in FIG. 36, interrupts are first prohibited (Sg31). Next, a sampling command is output to the sampling circuit 43, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 is latched, and the value of the latched random number is input from the I / O port 41d and extracted. The random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the HL register (Sg32).

  Next, the lower byte value and upper byte value of the random number stored in the HL register are exchanged with each other using the A register. At this time, the value stored in the HL register is acquired as a random number for internal lottery (Sg33). Then, after permitting the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sg31 (Sg34), the random number acquisition process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  Returning to FIG. 35, when the random number acquisition process ends, the process proceeds to step Sg6, the state number (any one of 0 to 3) is stored in the RAM 41c according to the game state of the game, and the process proceeds to step Sg7. In the gaming state indicated by, the first part number for lottery is stored in the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to step Sg8. In the step of Sg7, when the state number is 0, that is, when no special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, 01H (big bonus (1)) is set as the combination number to be drawn first. When the state number is 1, that is, when any special combination is carried over in the normal gaming state, 07H (replay) is first set as the combination number to be drawn, and the state number is 2 or 3 In this case, that is, in the case of a challenge bonus or a regular bonus, 08H (bell) is first set as a winning number to be drawn.

  In the step of Sg8, it is confirmed whether or not the lot number subject to lottery is 0AH, that is, whether or not the lottery for all the lottery targets has been completed. If it is 0AH, that is, all the lottery subject If the lottery for the second part has been completed, the process proceeds to step Sg9. If it is not 0AH, the process proceeds to step Sg10.

  In step Sg9, the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is cleared {stores 00H}, and the internal lottery process is terminated.

  In step Sg10, it is checked whether the common flag registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 5B is 1 in association with the role number to be processed. If it is 1, the process goes to step Sg11. move on. If not 1, the process proceeds to step Sg12.

  In step Sg11, the address (see FIG. 6) of the storage area for the number of determination values in the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table in FIG. 5B in association with the role number to be processed is read. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg12, first, the setting value stored in the RAM 41c is read, and further, the ROM 41b registered in the role-specific table of FIG. 5B in association with the processing target role number and the read setting value. Read the address of the storage area for the number of judgment values. Then, the number of determination values stored at this address is acquired, and the process proceeds to step Sg13.

  In the step of Sg13, the number of determination values acquired in the step of Sg11 or Sg12 is added to the random number value for internal lottery, and the result of the addition is used as a new random number value. Here, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred when the number of determination values is added to the random number for internal lottery (Sg14). The occurrence of an overflow indicates that the winning combination corresponding to the processing target winning number has been won. If an overflow occurs, the process proceeds to step Sg16. If no overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sg15.

  In step Sg15, 1 is added to the role number to be processed, and the process returns to step Sg8.

  In the step of Sg16, it is confirmed whether or not the combination number is 01H to 06H, that is, a combination number indicating a special combination or a combination including a special combination, and if it is 01H to 06H, the process proceeds to the step of Sg17. If it is not 01H to 06H, the process proceeds to step Sg20.

  In the step of Sg17, the winning number of the special combination and the winning number of the general combination registered in the conversion table of FIG. 5B in association with the processing target combination number are read, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg18. The winning number of the special combination is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) of the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to step Sg19.

  In the step of Sg20, the winning number of the general combination registered in the conversion table of FIG. 5B in association with the processing target combination number is read, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg19.

  In the step of Sg19, the winning number of the general combination read in the step of Sg17 or Sg20 is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) of the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to the step of Sg21.

  In step Sg21, the winning number of the general combination stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is stored in the B register, and the internal lottery process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop control data selection process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd3.

  In the stop control data selection process, first, the C register is cleared (stores 00H) (Sh1), and a bonus confirmation process for confirming whether or not the game is in bonus is performed (Sh2). Proceed to step Sh3.

  In the bonus confirmation process, it is determined whether or not the game is in bonus, specifically, whether or not the game is in regular bonus, and the result is the zero flag value and carry flag in the F register. Set to the value of. The zero flag is set to 0 when the regular bonus is being used, and is set to 1 otherwise. The carry flag is set to 1 when the big bonus or the challenge bonus is being used, and is set to 0 otherwise. That is, when the zero flag is 1 and the carry flag is 1, it indicates that the challenge bonus is in progress.

  In the step of Sh3, it is determined whether the value of the zero flag is 0. If it is 0, that is, if the regular bonus is in effect, the process jumps to the step of Sh8. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step Sh4.

  In the step of Sh4, it is determined whether the value of the carry flag is 0. If it is 0, that is, in the normal gaming state, the process jumps to the step of Sh8. If it is 1, that is, if the challenge bonus is in progress, the process proceeds to step Sh5.

  In the step of Sh5, the value [C000H] of all the small roles winning flags indicating that winnings of all the small roles (Bell, Cherry) are allowed is right shifted [00C0H] by 8 bits, and the lower 8 bits [ C0H] is stored in the C register. Further, the process proceeds to step Sh6 to store INDEX_CB in the A register. In the present embodiment, INDEX_CB is the difference [20H = from the start address [ctrldata_index (= 1000H)] of the stop control data index area to the start address [1020H] of the stop control data index area in the CB. 32] [1/2] [10H = 16].

  Then, the CPU 41a proceeds to the step of Sh7 and jumps to the step of Sh12.

  In the step of Sh8, the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) (special role winning number) is stored in the A register, the process proceeds to the step of Sh9, and the value of the A register is added to the value of the A register [2 × special Winning number of the role]. Further, proceed to the step of Sh10, add the value of the A register to the value of the A register [4 × special role winning number], proceed to the step of Sh11, and win the winning number of the general role stored in the B register Is added to the A register. At this time, [4 × special combination winning number + general winning combination number] is stored in the A register, and the CPU 41a proceeds to step Sh12.

  In the step of Sh12, the value of the A register is stored in the E register, the process proceeds to the step of Sh13, and the D register is cleared (00H is stored). That is, [00H] is stored in the upper 8 bits (D register) of the DE register. On the other hand, in the case where the lower 8 bits (E register) are not in CB, when [4 × special role winning number + general role winning number] stored in the A register in step Sh11 is in CB [INDEX_CB (= 10H = 16)] stored in the A register in the step of Sh6 is stored.

  The CPU 41a proceeds to step Sh14, stores the start address [ctrldata_index (= 1000H)] of the index area of the stop control data in the HL register, and proceeds to step Sh15. The upper 8 bits [10H] are stored in the H register, and the lower 8 bits [00H] are stored in the L register.

  In the step of Sh15, the DE register is added to the HL register (HL + DE), the process proceeds to Sh16, and the DE register is added again to the HL register (HL + 2 × DE). That is, [ctrldata_index + 2 × (4 × winning number for special role + winning number for general role)] when not in CB, [ctrldata_index + 2 × (INDEX_CB)] = [ctrldata_index + 32] = [ 1020H] is stored in the HL register. The value of the HL register is [the address of the storage area for storing the lower 8 bits of the start address of the stop control data corresponding to the winning number].

  The CPU 41a proceeds to step Sh17, reads the address of the ROM 41b stored in the HL register, and stores the [lower 8 bits of the start address of the stop control data corresponding to the winning number] stored in this address. Obtain it, store it in the A register, and go to the step of Sh18.

  In the step of Sh18, 1 is added to the HL register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sh19. The address of the ROM 41b stored in the HL register is read out and stored in this address [for stop control corresponding to the winning number. The upper 8 bits of the head address of the data] are obtained, stored in the H register, and the process proceeds to step Sh20.

  In the step of Sh20, the value of the A register is stored in the L register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sh21, and is stored in the HL register [the start address of the stop control data corresponding to the winning number (including the upper and lower levels)] Is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr).

  As described above, according to the steps Sh1 to Sh21, in the gaming state other than the challenge bonus, the start address (index data) of the stop control data is based on the winning number (the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role). This address is selected and stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr). During the challenge bonus, regardless of the winning number, the start address (index data) of the stop control data for the challenge bonus is selected, and this address is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr). .

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning flag storage process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd4.

  In the winning flag storing process, first, in the Si1 step, the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) (the winning number of the general combination) is stored in the A register, the process proceeds to the Si2 step, and the value of the A register is set to the A register. Is added [2 × general winning number]. Further, the process proceeds to step Si3, and the lower 8 bits [00H] of the head address [iwflag_table_g (= 2000H)] of the general-use number / flag conversion table area are added to the A register. At this point, [00H + 2 × general combination winning number] is stored in the A register, and the CPU 41a proceeds to step Si4.

  In the Si4 step, the value of the A register is stored in the L register, and the process proceeds to the Si5 step, and the upper 8 bits [20H] of the leading address [iwflag_table_g (= 2000H)] of the general-use number / flag conversion table area Is stored in the H register. At this time, [iwflag_table_g + 2 × general winning number] is stored in the HL register. The value of the HL register is [address of storage area storing the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general combination corresponding to the winning number of the general combination].

  Then, the CPU 41a proceeds to the step of Si6, stores the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) (the winning number of the special role) in the A register, proceeds to the step of Si7, and performs the number / flag conversion table for the special role. The lower 8 bits [08H] of the start address [iwflag_table_b (= 2008H)] of the area are added to the A register. At this point, [08H + special winning number] is stored in the A register, and the CPU 41a proceeds to the step of Si8.

  In the Si8 step, the value of the HL register stored in the Si4 step is stored (saved) in the stack area.

  In the step of Si9, the value of the A register is stored in the L register, and the process proceeds to the step of Si10, and the upper 8 bits [20H] of the top address [iwflag_table_b (= 2008H)] of the special-use number / flag conversion table area Is stored in the H register. At this time, [iwflag_table_b + special winning number] is stored in the HL register. The value of this HL register is [the address of the storage area for storing the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the special role corresponding to the winning number of the special role].

  Then, the CPU 41a proceeds to the step of Si11, reads the address of the ROM 41b stored in the HL register, and stores [the lower part of the internal winning flag for the special role corresponding to the winning number of the special role) stored in this address. 8 bits] is acquired, stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Si12.

  In the Si12 step, the value of the HL register stored (saved) in the stack area in the Si8 step [iwflag_table_g + 2 × general winning number] = [lower 8 of the internal winning flag for the general corresponding to the winning number of the general winning The address of the storage area for storing the bits] is stored (returned) in the HL register, and the process proceeds to step Si13.

  In the step of Si13, the address of the ROM 41b stored in the HL register is read, and [the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role] stored in this address is obtained. The logical sum (OR) with the value of the A register is calculated, and the result is stored in the A register. At this time, [the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role OR the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the special role corresponding to the winning number of the special role] is stored in the A register. Is done.

  The CPU 41a proceeds to the Si14 step, adds 1 to the L register, proceeds to the Si15 step, reads the address of the ROM 41b stored in the HL register, and stores the address in this address [general The upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general combination corresponding to the winning number of the combination] is acquired and stored in the H register, and the process proceeds to step S16 to store the value of the A register in the L register. At this point, [the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role, or the winning number of the OR special role Are stored in the HL register.

  Further, the process proceeds to the step of Si17, the value of the H register is stored in the A register, the process proceeds to the step of Si18, and the value of the C register stored in the step Sg1 or Sg5 of the stop control data selection process is The logical sum (OR) with the value of the register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, the process proceeds to step S19, and the value of the A register is stored in the H register. In the C register, [00H] is stored when the challenge bonus is not set, and [C0H], which is the upper 8 bits of all the small role winning flags when the challenge bonus is set.

  In other words, at this time, if the bonus is not during the bonus, [00H OR upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role, the internal for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role Lower 8 bits of the winning flag OR Lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the special role corresponding to the winning number of the special role] In other words, the internal winning corresponding to the combination of the winning number of the general role and the winning number of the special role A flag is stored in the HL register. In the case of a challenge bonus, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the C0H OR general role, the lower order of the internal winning flag for the general role corresponding to the winning number of the general role In other words, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag for the special role corresponding to the winning number of the OR special role], in other words, the internal winning flag indicating that the winning of bells and cherries is uniformly allowed in the challenge bonus. Is stored in the HL register.

  Finally, the CPU 41a proceeds to step Si20, and stores the value of the HL register in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag).

  As described above, by the steps of Si1 to Si20, the winning number (the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role) is a 16-bit 2 in which 1 is set to the value of the bit corresponding to the winning role. After being converted to a decimal value, a logical sum of the converted value and the data corresponding to the game state ([0000H] or [C000H] which is the all-small role winning flag) is calculated, and the result is acceptable in the game. Is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag indicating the winning.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the reel rotation process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd5.

  In the reel rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not a wait time (about 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game (Sj1), and the wait time must have elapsed. For example, it waits until the wait time elapses.

  If the wait time has elapsed in step Sj1, a new wait time is set (Sj2).

  Next, the setting at the time of starting the rotation of the reel motor is performed, and the rotation of the reel is started (Sj3). Then, referring to the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr), the stop control data is specified, and based on the specified stop control data, the game state of the game, the winning status of the combination, the stop of other reels A stop control table corresponding to the situation is created for each reel being rotated (Sj4), and a setting is made when the stop preparation is completed (Sj5). As a result, the stop operation can be validated, and then the stop operation becomes valid when a constant-speed rotation of the reel is detected in the process at the time of passing through the origin of the timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether any stop switch operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected (Sj6). If no stop switch operation is detected, a reel rotation error (over a certain period of time) is detected. Then, it is determined whether or not an error determined when the reel reference position is not detected by the reel sensor 33 (Sj7). If a reel rotation error has not occurred, an insertion error (medal insertion) is further performed. Whether or not a medal insertion was detected outside the permitted period, and whether or not a payout error (medal payout was detected outside the medal payout period) Error) is determined (Sj8, Sj9), and any error occurs in steps Sj7 to Sj9. If it is not determined, the flow returns to step SJ6.

  If it is determined in Sj8 that an insertion error has occurred, or if a dispensing error is determined in Sj9, an error code indicating a loading / dispensing error during reel rotation is set in the register (Sj10). ), The process proceeds to the error processing shown in FIG. 29 (Sj11). When the error is released, the process returns to step Sj6 again.

  If it is determined in step Sj7 that a reel rotation error has occurred, an error code indicating a reel rotation error is set in the register (Sj12), and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG. 29 (Sj13). Along with this, the rotation of the reels is also temporarily stopped. When the error is released, the process returns to step Sj3 again, and the reel rotation is resumed.

  If any stop switch operation is detected in step Sj6, the number of steps from the reel reference position at that time in the reel motor corresponding to the stop switch (the number of steps to be the stop operation position) is calculated. After acquiring and setting the work corresponding to the stop reel (Sj14), the process waits until the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop operation stops (Sj15).

  Then, when the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop operation is stopped, it is determined whether or not all the reels are stopped (Sj16). If all the reels are not stopped, the process returns to the step of Sj4, and all the reels are If it is stopped, the reel rotation process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG.

  As described above, in the reel rotation processing, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started, the rotation of the reels for which the stop operation has not been detected is continued until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected. Then, on the condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected, control is performed to stop the display result on the corresponding reel. Even if the reel rotation temporarily stops due to the occurrence of a reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. Control is performed to stop the display result of the corresponding reels on the condition that the rotation of the reels that have not been continued is continued and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd6.

  The winning determination process in this embodiment is mainly composed of three processes. The first process is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game. The second process is a process for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag. The third process is a process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag.

  The step of Sk1 is a process of setting a winning symbol flag based on the display result of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R derived and displayed in the game.

  The CPU 41a first performs a winning symbol determination process (Sk1), and proceeds to Step Sk2. In the winning symbol determination process, the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower eight bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register. The E register stores the number of payout medals.

  As described above, in step Sk1, the higher 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the B register, and the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag are stored in the C register.

  The subsequent steps Sk2 to Sk10 and Sk17 are processes for determining an abnormal winning based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sk2, the value of the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) (internal winning flag) is stored in the HL register, and in the step of Sk3, the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag which is the value of the L register are stored in the A register. Store and proceed to step Sk4 to invert all bits of the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is inverted to 0 if it is 1, and converted to an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sk5.

  In the step of Sk5, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register and the logical product (AND) of the value of the A register are calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sk6. If the A register is not 0, the process jumps to the step Sk17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to the step Sk7.

  In the Sk7 step, the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag, which is the value of the H register, are stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the Sk8 step to invert all the bits of the A register. That is, each bit is inverted to 1 if it is 0, and is converted to 0 if it is 1 and converted into an abnormal winning determination flag, and the process proceeds to step Sk9.

  In the step of Sk9, the logical product (AND) of the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the B register and the value of the A register is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sk10. It is determined whether the A register is not 0. If it is not 0, the process jumps to the step of Sk17, and if it is 0, the process proceeds to the step of Sk11.

  The step of Sk17 is a jump destination when it is determined in the steps of Sk6 and Sk10 that the A register is not 0, that is, when a winning other than the winning allowed in the game is won, and indicates an abnormal winning error. The error code is set in the register, and the process proceeds to error processing shown in FIG.

  As described above, the abnormal winning is determined based on the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag by the steps Sk2 to Sk10 and Sk17.

  The subsequent steps Sk11 to Sk18 (excluding Sk17) are processing upon winning based on a winning symbol flag.

  In the step of Sk11, the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the C register is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to the step of Sk12, and the upper 8 bits of the winning symbol flag that is the value of the B register and the A register The logical sum (OR) of the values is calculated, the result is stored in the A register, and the process proceeds to step Sk13.

  In step Sk13, it is determined whether the A register is 0. If the A register is 0, that is, if no winning combination has been won, the process is terminated. If the winning combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sk14.

  In step Sk14, the value of the bit (sixth bit) corresponding to replay is checked against the lower 8 bits of the winning symbol flag which is the value of the C register, and if the value is 0, that is, other than replay When the winning combination is won, 1 is set to the zero flag, and when the value is 1, that is, when the replay is won, 0 is set to the zero flag. The process proceeds to step Sk15 to determine whether the zero flag is 1. If it is 1, the process jumps to step Sk18, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sk16.

  In the step of Sk16, a process when a replay is won, such as setting a flag during replay game indicating a replay game, is performed, and the process is terminated.

  The step of Sk18 is a jump destination when it is confirmed in the step of Sk15 that a role other than replay has been won, and a process at the time of winning that is performed when a role other than replay such as calculation of the number of payouts is won is performed. Then, the process ends.

  As described above, the process at the time of winning based on the winning symbol flag is performed by the steps Sk2 to Sk10 and Sk17.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning process executed by the CPU 41a in the step of Sk18.

  In the winning process, first, with reference to the combination table shown in FIG. 4B, the gaming state (state number) of the game and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to the combination indicated by the winning symbol flag are set (Sm1). , Go to step Sm2.

  In step Sm2, it is determined whether the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If neither the big bonus (1) nor the big bonus (2) is won in the Sm2 step, the process proceeds to the Sm5 step, and either the big bonus (1) or the big bonus (2) is won in the Sm2 step. Then, the big bonus medium flag indicating the big bonus is set in the RAM 41c, the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) of the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sm3), and the medal in the big bonus is paid out in the RAM 41c. The value of the big bonus medium payout counter in which the total number is stored is initialized (set to 0) (Sm4), and the process proceeds to step Sm5.

  In step Sm5, it is determined whether or not the challenge bonus has been won based on the winning symbol flag. If the challenge bonus has not been won in step Sm5, the winning process is terminated and the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. If the challenge bonus has been won in step Sm5, a challenge bonus medium flag indicating that the challenge bonus is in progress is set in the RAM 41c, and the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) in the RAM 41c is cleared (00H is stored) (Sm6). The RAM 41c initializes (sets to 0) the value of the number-of-payout-counter for the challenge bonus in which the total number of medals paid out in the challenge bonus is stored (Sm7), ends the winning process, and returns to the flowchart of FIG. To do.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control details of the game end process executed by the CPU 41a in step Sd8.

  In the game end process, first, a bonus-related counter assigned to the RAM 41c is updated (Sn1). Specifically, during the regular bonus, the value of the regular bonus game number counter in which the number of regular bonus games is stored is decremented by 1, and the value of the regular bonus medium prize counter in which the number of winnings in the regular bonus is stored is incremented by 1. To do. During the big bonus, the payout number of medals of the game is added to the value of the big bonus medium payout counter. During the challenge bonus, the number of medals to be paid out for the game is added to the value of the payout counter during challenge bonus.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sn2). If the regular bonus flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sn5. If the regular bonus flag is set in the step of Sn2, whether or not the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 0, or the value of the regular bonus medium winning counter is 8. Is determined (Sn3). If the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied in the Sn3 step, the process proceeds to the Sn5 step. If the regular bonus end condition is satisfied, the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sn4). ), Go to the step of Sn5.

  In the step of Sn5, it is determined whether or not the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sn5, the process proceeds to the step of Sn11. If the big bonus medium flag is set, whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, the number of big bonus medium payouts. It is determined whether or not the counter value exceeds 345 sheets (Sn6). If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sn6, the process proceeds to step Sn8. If the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the big bonus medium flag and the regular bonus medium flag set in the RAM 41c are displayed. Clear (Sn7) and proceed to step Sn20.

  In step Sn8, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is not set in the RAM 41c, that is, whether or not the big bonus is in effect and the regular bonus is not activated. If the regular bonus flag is set in the Sn8 step, the process proceeds to the Sn20 step. If the regular bonus flag is not set in the Sn8 step, the regular bonus indicating that the regular bonus is in progress. A regular bonus operation start flag indicating the operation start of the flag and the regular bonus is set in the RAM 41c (Sn9), the value of the regular bonus game number counter and the value of the regular bonus intermediate winning counter are initialized (the value of the regular bonus game number counter is 12). Is set and the value of the regular bonus winning counter is cleared) (Sn10), the process proceeds to the step of Sn20.

  In the step of Sn11, it is determined whether a challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the challenge bonus flag is not set in step Sn11, the process proceeds to step Sn14. If the challenge bonus flag is set, it is determined whether or not the challenge bonus end condition is satisfied, that is, the number of challenges bonus payouts. It is determined whether or not the counter value exceeds 253 sheets (Sn12). If the challenge bonus end condition is not satisfied in step Sn12, the process proceeds to step Sn14. If the challenge bonus end condition is satisfied, the in-challenge bonus flag set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sn13). , Go to the step of Sn14.

  In the step of Sn14, it is determined whether or not a challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the challenge bonus flag is not set in step Sn14, the process proceeds to step Sn17. If the challenge bonus flag is set in step Sn14, whether the CB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sn15). When the CB medium signal is ON in the step of Sn15, that is, when the challenge bonus is being performed and the next game is not the challenge bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step of Sn52, and the CB is being performed in the step of Sn15. If the signal is not in the ON state, that is, if the challenge bonus starts from the next game, the CB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sn16), and the process proceeds to Sn52.

  In the step of Sn17, it is determined whether or not the CB signal is on in the external output signal. If the CB signal is not ON in the Sn17 step, the process proceeds to the Sn20 step. If the CB signal is ON in the Sn17 step, it is determined whether or not the challenge bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sn18). If the challenge bonus flag is set in the Sn18 step, that is, if the challenge bonus is not terminated, the process proceeds to the step Sn52. If the challenge bonus flag is not set in the Sn18 step, that is, the challenge bonus is When the process is to be ended, the CB signal is turned off in the external output signal (Sn19), and the process proceeds to step Sn52.

  In the step of Sn20, it is determined whether or not the RB signal is on in the external output signal. If the RB signal is not ON in step Sn20, the process proceeds to step Sn24. If the RB signal is ON, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sn21). ). When the regular bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sn21, that is, when the regular bonus is ended and the regular bonus is not resumed thereafter, the process proceeds to the step of Sn23. When the regular bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sn21, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c (Sn22). When the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sn22, that is, when the regular bonus is restarted during the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sn23, and the regular bonus operation start flag is set in the step of Sn22. If there is no regular bonus, that is, if the regular bonus end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sn24. In the step of Sn23, the RB signal is turned off and the process proceeds to the step of Sn24.

  In the step of Sn24, it is determined whether or not a regular bonus operation start flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus operation start flag is not set in step Sn24, the process proceeds to step Sn27. If the regular bonus operation start flag is set in step Sn24, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game. Then, the regular bonus operation start flag in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sn25), and the process waits until the output waiting time (tw) of the RB signal is passed (Sn26), and when the output waiting time elapses, the process proceeds to the step of Sn27.

  In the step of Sn27, it is determined whether or not a big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sn27, the process proceeds to the step of Sn33. If the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sn27, whether or not the BB medium signal of the external output signals is ON. Is determined (Sn28). When the BB medium signal is ON in the step of Sn28, that is, when the big bonus is being performed and the next game is not the start game of the big bonus, the process proceeds to the step of Sn33 and the BB is being performed in the step of Sn28. When the signal is not ON, that is, when the big bonus starts from the next game, the BB medium signal of the external output signals is turned ON (Sn 29), and the effect waiting time of the BB winning effect is stored in the register. After setting (Sn30) and enabling detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 (Sn31), an effect waiting process for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sn30 elapses (Sn32). And after completion | finish of an effect waiting process, it progresses to the step of Sn33.

  In the effect waiting process, as shown in FIG. 44, the effect waiting time set in the register is set in the general-purpose time counter of the RAM 41c (Sn101), and it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sn102). If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Sn104. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 34 is performed (Sn103), and then the process proceeds to step Sn104. . In the step of Sn103, it is determined whether or not the production waiting time set in the general-purpose time counter has elapsed. If the production waiting time has not elapsed, the process returns to the step of Sn102, and if the production waiting time has elapsed. Then, the production waiting process is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  In the step of Sn33, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus flag is set in the RAM 41c. If the regular bonus flag is not set in step Sn33, the process proceeds to step Sn36. If the regular bonus flag is set in step Sn33, whether the RB signal in the external output signal is ON. Is determined (Sn34). When the RB signal is ON in the step of Sn34, that is, when the regular bonus is in progress and the next game is not the regular bonus start game, the process proceeds to the step of Sn36 and RB is being processed in the step of Sn34. If the signal is not ON, that is, if the regular bonus starts from the next game, the RB signal is turned ON among the external output signals (Sn35), and the process proceeds to Sn36.

  In the step of Sn36, it is determined whether or not the BB signal among the external output signals is ON. If the BB medium signal is not ON in step Sn36, the process proceeds to step Sn52. If the BB signal is ON in step Sn36, it is determined whether the big bonus medium flag is set in the RAM 41c. Determine (Sn37). When the big bonus medium flag is set in the step of Sn37, that is, when the big bonus is not ended, the process proceeds to the step of Sn52, and when the big bonus medium flag is not set in the step of Sn37, that is, the big bonus is In the case of ending, after the BB signal of the external output signal is turned off (Sn38), the production waiting time of the ending effect is set in the register (Sn39), and the detection of the adjustment switch 10 operation is validated (Sn40) An effect waiting process (see FIG. 44) for waiting until the effect waiting time set in the step of Sn39 elapses is performed (Sn41). After the effect waiting process in the Sn41 step is completed, initialization 2 is performed to initialize the general work in addition to the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c (Sn42), and then the process proceeds to the Sn43 step.

  In the step of Sn43, it is determined whether or not the stop function is set to be effective. If the stop function is set to be invalid in the step of Sn43, the process proceeds to the step of Sn52. If the stop function is set to be enabled in the step of Sn43, a stop code indicating the stop state is set in the register. (Sn44) and the stop code stored in the register is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (Sn45). Then, it is determined whether or not the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected (Sn 46). If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is not detected, whether or not the operation of the reset switch 23 is further detected. If the operation of the reset switch 23 is not detected (Sn47), it is further determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected (Sn48), and if the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected. Return to the step of Sn46. If the operation of the reset / setting switch 38 is detected in the step of Sn46, or if the operation of the reset switch 23 is detected in the step of Sn47, the operation proceeds to the step of Sn50, and the operation of the settlement switch 10 is performed in the step of Sn48. If it is detected, the settlement process shown in FIG. 34 is performed (Sn49), and the process returns to the Sn44 step.

  In the Sn50 step, the stop code stored in the register is cleared. And the display state of the game auxiliary | assistant display 12 is cleared (Sn51), and it progresses to the step of Sn52.

  In the step of Sn52, after performing initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c, the process at the end of the game is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the process at the end of the game, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is inactive during the big bonus. If the regular bonus is not in operation during the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated. It is supposed to let you.

  Also, before determining whether or not the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied. If the big bonus end condition is not satisfied in the determination, the regular bonus is not determined. It is determined whether or not the bonus is not activated. If the bonus is not activated, the regular bonus is activated.

  Further, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB medium signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed, Even if the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops, and when the output waiting time elapses in this state, the RB is started again. The signal output is resumed.

  In addition, during the period until the production waiting time of the BB winning effect and the ending effect elapses, the detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, the settlement of the credit is performed. Control will be performed. In addition, even when the settlement switch 10 is activated, detection of the operation of the settlement switch 10 is validated. Even when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected during this period, credit settlement control is performed.

  45 and 46 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a by interrupting the start process or the game process in response to the occurrence of the interrupt 3, that is, at an interval of 0.56 ms.

  In the timer interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sp1). That is, the execution of another interrupt process during the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited. Then, the register in use is saved in the stack area (Sp2).

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt process is advanced by 1 from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 (Sp3). In the step of Sp3, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the counter value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, the branch counter value is referenced to determine whether it is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 (Sp4). If it is not timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or whether they are rotating at a constant speed, and whether the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are started or are rotating at a constant speed. For example, the motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sp8 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sp23 described later is executed (Sp5).

  Next, referring to the branch counter value, it is determined whether it is 1 or not, i.e., timer interrupt 2 (Sp6). If it is not timer interrupt 2, i.e., timer interrupt 1, reel motor Reel start processing (Sp7) for controlling the step time interval when starting 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sp8) for changing phase signal data of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C After the stop of 32R, the motor phase signal standby process (Sp9) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation after a predetermined time has been sequentially executed, and then the registers saved in the stack area at Sp2 are restored (Sp20). The interrupt prohibited in the step is permitted (Sp21), and the process returns to the state before the interrupt.

  Further, in the case of timer interrupt 2 in the step of Sp6, LED dynamic display processing (Sp10) for dynamically lighting various indicators, and output processing of control signals and the like for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to an output port (Sp11), random number update process for updating various software random numbers (Sp12), time counter update process for updating various time counters (Sp13), command transmission for transmitting commands stored in the command queue to the effect control board 90 After sequentially executing the processing (Sp14) and the external output signal update processing (Sp15) for updating the external output signal, the registers saved in the stack area at Sp2 are restored (Sp20), and the interrupts prohibited at the step of Sp1 are permitted. (Sp21) and the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  If it is timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sp4, it is further determined by referring to the branch counter value whether it is 3 or not, that is, timer interrupt 4 (Sp16). If it is not interrupt 4, that is, timer interrupt 3, port input processing (Sp17) for inputting detection data of various switches from the input port, passing the origin of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R during rotation (reel reference) (Passing position) to detect the occurrence of a reel rotation error, check if the stop preparation is complete, and if the stop preparation is complete and if it is rotating at a constant speed, the spinning reel Based on the detection signal of various switches, these various switches satisfy the detection conditions. After sequentially executing the switch input determination process (Sp19) for determining whether or not, the register saved in the stack area in Sp2 is restored (Sp20), and the interrupts prohibited in the step of Sp1 are permitted (Sp21). Return to the process before inclusion.

  If the timer interrupt is 4 at the step of Sp16, the stop position is determined from the stop operation position when the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is determined, and the number of steps after which the stop should be calculated is calculated. Stop switch process (Sp22), the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process is counted, and when it is time to stop, stop process (Sp23) to start braking by two-phase excitation, and brake in the stop process After executing the final stop process (Sp24) for three-phase excitation after a certain time from the start in sequence, the registers saved in the stack area in Sp2 are restored (Sp20), and the interrupts prohibited in the Sp1 step are permitted. (Sp21), the process returns to the state before the interruption.

  FIG. 47 shows the control contents of the interruption interrupt process executed by the CPU 41a when the interruption 2 occurs, that is, when the voltage drop signal from the interruption detection circuit 48 is input, interrupting the execution process or the game process. It is a flowchart which shows.

  In the power interruption interruption process, first, interruption is prohibited (Sq1). In other words, other interrupt processing is prohibited from being executed with the start of the power interruption interrupt processing. Next, all registers that may be in use are saved in the stack area (Sq2). Note that the values of the I register and IY register described above are used, but are not saved here because the same fixed value is always set with the initialization at the time of startup.

  Next, the detection data of the voltage drop signal is acquired from the input port, and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq3). At this time, if the voltage drop signal is not input, the register saved in the stack area in Sq2 is restored (Sq4), the interrupt prohibited in the step of Sq1 is permitted (Sq5), and the process before the interrupt is performed. Return.

  If a voltage drop signal is input in step Sq3, destruction diagnosis data (5A (H) in this embodiment) is set (Sq6), and all output ports are initialized (Sq7). . Next, RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c becomes 0 (Sq8), and access to the RAM 41c is performed. It is prohibited (Sq9).

  Then, except for the determination of whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sq10, where Sq10 is the same processing as Sq3), the processing enters a loop processing in which no processing is performed. That is, when the voltage decreases as it is, the operation is stopped internally. Therefore, the CPU 41a reliably stops operation when the power is interrupted. Further, in this loop processing, when the voltage recovers and the voltage drop signal is not input, the above-described startup processing is executed, and if the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is normal, the original processing is performed. It will return to.

  In this embodiment, after the access to the RAM 41c is prohibited, the output state of the voltage drop signal is monitored, and when the voltage drop signal is not input, it is determined that the voltage is restored, and the process proceeds to the startup process. However, no processing is performed in the loop processing, and the voltage is recovered while the loop processing is being performed, and the process proceeds to the start-up processing based on the input of the reset signal from the reset circuit 49. You may make it do.

  Next, the control contents of initialization 1 to 4 executed by the CPU 41a in response to the establishment of the initialization condition will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the control contents of initialization 1 executed by the CPU 41a before the transition to the setting change mode in the startup process.

  In the initialization 1, first, the initialization table of the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 1 are read (Sr1). A pointer is set to the read start address (7E00 (H)) (Sr2). Next, the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer−7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sr3), and the number of bytes (1D3 (H) + M) of the area to be initialized is set (Sr4). Then, a RAM clear process for clearing data from the start address set in Sr2 over the number of bytes set in Sr4 is executed (Sr5). When the RAM clear process is completed, the initialization 1 is completed. Return to.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the RAM clear process executed in step Sr5 of FIG.

  In the RAM clear process, 1 byte data indicated by the address indicated by the pointer is cleared to 0 (Sr101), and 1 is subtracted from the initialization byte number (the number of bytes set as an area to be initialized) (Sr102). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of initialized bytes after subtraction has become 0, that is, whether or not the initialization of all the specified number of bytes has been completed (Sr103). If the initialized byte number after subtraction is not 0, the pointer is advanced by 1 (Sr104), the process returns to Sr101, and the processes of Sr101 to Sr4 are repeated until the initialized byte number becomes 0. If the initialization byte number after subtraction in step Sr103 is 0, the initialization of all the specified number of bytes is completed, so the RAM clear process is terminated and the process returns to the original process. .

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the control contents of initialization 2 executed by the CPU 41a at the end of the big bonus in the game end processing of Sd8.

  In the initialization 2, first, interrupts are prohibited (Sr11), and then the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 2 are read with reference to the initialization table of the ROM 41b (Sr12). In initialization 2, since two start addresses and initialization sizes corresponding to the two start addresses are registered, a pointer is set at the start address (7E28 (H)) of the area to be initialized first among the read start addresses. (Sr13), the number of bytes (67 (H)) of the area to be initialized first is set (Sr14), and the RAM clear process for clearing data from the start address set in Sr13 over the number of bytes set in Sr14 (See FIG. 49) is executed (Sr15). When the RAM clear process is completed, the pointer is set to the start address (7EBA (H)) of the second area to be initialized among the read start addresses (Sr16), and the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer− 7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sr17), and the number of bytes (119 (H) + M) of the second area to be initialized is set (Sr18). Then, a RAM clear process (see FIG. 49) for clearing data from the start address set in Sr16 over the number of bytes set in Sr18 is executed (Sr19). When the RAM clear process is completed, it is prohibited in the step of Sr11. The interrupt that has been made is permitted (Sr20), and the process returns to the original process even after the initialization 2 is completed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the control contents of initialization 3 executed when the CPU 41a performs normal processing when the data in the RAM 41c is normal.

  In the initialization 3, first, the initialization table of the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 3 are read (Sr21). Since two start addresses and initialization sizes corresponding to the two start addresses are registered in initialization 3, a pointer is set at the start address (7EB7 (H)) of the area to be initialized first among the read start addresses. (Sr22), the number of bytes (3 (H)) of the area to be initialized first is set (Sr23), and the data is cleared from the start address set in Sr22 over the number of bytes set in Sr23. (See FIG. 49) is executed (Sr24). When the RAM clear process is completed, the pointer is set to the start address (7F05 (H)) of the second area to be initialized among the read start addresses (Sr25), and the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer− 7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sr26), and the number of bytes (CE (H) + M) in the second area to be initialized is set (Sr27). Then, a RAM clear process (see FIG. 49) for clearing data from the start address set in Sr25 to the number of bytes set in Sr27 is executed (Sr28). When the RAM clear process is completed, initialization 3 is ended. Return to the original process.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the control content of initialization 4 executed by the CPU 41a for each game in the game end process of Sd8.

  In the initialization 4, first, interrupts are prohibited (Sr31), and then the start address and the initialization size registered corresponding to the initialization 4 are read with reference to the initialization table of the ROM 41b (Sr32). A pointer is set to the read start address (7F05 (H)) (Sr33). Next, the size of the unused stack area (M = stack pointer-7FD2 (H)) is calculated (Sr34), and the number of bytes (CE (H) + M) of the area to be initialized is set (Sr35). Then, a RAM clear process (see FIG. 49) is executed to clear data from the start address set in Sr33 over the number of bytes set in Sr5 (Sr36). When the RAM clear process is completed, it is prohibited in the step of Sr31. The interrupt is permitted (Sr37), and the process returns to the original process even after the initialization 4 is completed.

  Next, various control contents executed by the CPU 91a of the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 will be described based on the flowcharts of FIGS.

  When a reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95 to the sub-control unit 91, the CPU 91a performs a startup process (sub) shown in FIG.

  In the startup process (sub), after initialization of the built-in device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, etc. (Ss1), access to the RAM 91c is permitted (Ss2). Then, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Ss3), and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity is 0 (Ss4).

  If the data in the RAM 91c is normal, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is normal, and the process proceeds to the step of Ss5. The production state before power interruption is restored. In step Ss5, it is determined whether or not the BB winning effect or the ending effect has been executed before the power interruption. If the BB winning effect or the ending effect has been executed, the BB winning effect or the ending effect is executed. Has reached the final stage (Ss6). If the final stage has been reached, the final stage control pattern is set (Ss7), and then the liquid crystal display is set according to the set control pattern. The effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the device 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the BB winning effect or ending effect has not been executed before the power interruption in the step of Sw5, or if the BB winning effect or ending effect has reached the final stage in the step of Ss6, After setting the last control pattern executed before disconnection (Ss8), the control of various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is performed according to the set control pattern. The effect control process to be performed is executed (Ss9), the interruption is permitted (Ss10), and the process proceeds to the loop process.

  If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Ss4, the data stored in the RAM 91c is not normal. Therefore, after the RAM 91c is initialized (Ss11), the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Ss12). In accordance with the set control pattern, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, effect effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and reel LED is executed (Ss9), and interruption is permitted (Ss10). ), Shift to loop processing.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the control content of the timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the CPU 91a at intervals of 1.12 ms based on the count of the internal clock.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), first, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the buffer (St1). If no command is stored in the buffer, the process proceeds to step St6. If a command is stored in the buffer, the command is acquired from the buffer (St2), and the process proceeds to step St3.

  In the step of St3, when the received command is an internal winning command, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern for continuous effect is already set in the RAM 91c. If the effect pattern for continuous effect is not set, the ROM 91b is determined. An effect pattern is selected by referring to the effect table stored in the table, selecting an effect pattern at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and setting the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as the effect pattern of the game. The selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step St4.

  In step St4, processing corresponding to the received command is performed, and the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, and the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control registered corresponding to the received command are stored. A control pattern setting process for reading the pattern and setting it in the RAM 91c is executed, and the process proceeds to step St5.

  In the step of St5, in accordance with the control pattern set in the step of St4, an effect control process for controlling various effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED is executed. Proceed to step.

  In the step of St6, after updating the values of various counters such as the random number counter of the RAM 91c, the process proceeds to the step of St7, and it is confirmed whether or not the content of data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of startup is normal. The RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and set so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c becomes 0, so that the timer interrupt process (sub) is completed.

  That is, the CPU 91a does not set the RAM parity adjustment data when the power interruption is detected like the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41, but the RAM parity adjustment data for each timer interrupt process (sub) that is periodically executed. Even if the power is cut off, it is possible to determine whether or not the content of the data backed up in the RAM 91c at the time of recovery is normal.

  FIGS. 55 and 56 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the control pattern setting process executed by the CPU 91a at the step St4 of the timer interrupt process (sub).

  In the control pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a setting start command (Su1). If the received command is a setting start command, the setting notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Su1), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not a setting start command in the step of Su1, it is determined whether or not the received command is an initialization command (Su3). If the received command is an initialization command, all areas of the RAM 91c are initialized (Su4), the above-described standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Su5), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an initialization command in step Su3, it is determined whether or not the received command is a standby command (Su6). If the received command is a standby command, the standby pattern is set as a control pattern (Su7), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Su6, if the received command is not a standby command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a stop command (Su8). If the received command is a stop command, it is further determined whether or not it is a stop command indicating the start (occurrence) of the stop state (Su9), and if it is a stop command indicating the start of the stop state. Then, the stop notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Su10), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not a stop command indicating the start of the stop state, that is, if it is a stop command indicating the release of the stop state, the standby pattern is set as the control pattern (Su7), and the control pattern setting process is terminated. Returning to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In the step of Su8, if the received command is not a stop command, it is determined whether or not the received command is an error command (Su11). If the received command is an error command, it is further determined whether or not it is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition (Su12). If the received command is an error command indicating the occurrence of an error condition, the currently set control pattern is determined. Are temporarily saved in the stack (Su13), the error notification pattern is set as a control pattern (Su14), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is not an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state, that is, if it is an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state, the control pattern saved in the stack at the time of occurrence of the error, that is, Su13 is set (Su15). Then, the control pattern setting process ends, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  If the received command is not an error command in the step of Su11, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout start command (Su16). If the received command is a payout start command, the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern (Su17), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. The sub-pattern is a control pattern that is set in an area different from the area in which the control pattern of the effect that is being executed is set, and is executed when the effect is executed in parallel with the control pattern of the effect that is being executed. It is a control pattern that is set separately from the control pattern for the production. That is, normally, when a new control pattern is set, the control pattern that was originally set is overwritten, whereas the control pattern is set as a sub-pattern, so that Patterns are set at the same time. For this reason, when the payout pattern is set as a sub-pattern in the step of Su17, an effect based on the payout pattern is executed concurrently with the effect currently being executed.

  In the step of Su16, if the received command is not a payout start command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a payout end command (Su18). If the received command is a payout end command, the payout pattern set as the sub-pattern is cleared (Su19), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. That is, in the step of Su19, only the effect based on the payout pattern that has been executed in parallel is finished, and only the effect that was originally executed continues.

  If it is determined in step Su18 that the received command is not a payout end command, it is determined whether the received command is a winning determination command (Su20). If the received command is a winning determination command, it is determined whether or not the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning (Su21). If the winning determination command indicates a big bonus winning, the BB winning pattern is set as a control pattern (Su22), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the winning determination command does not indicate a big bonus, it is further determined whether or not a winning other than the big bonus is indicated (Su23). If the prize determination command indicates a prize other than the big bonus, it corresponds to the winning prize among the winning patterns for executing the winning effect in which a specific effect is executed when the winning occurs. The winning pattern is set as a control pattern (Su24), the control pattern setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If no winning other than the big bonus is indicated in the step of Su23, the process proceeds to the step of Su29.

  If the command received in step Su20 is not a winning determination command, it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state command (Su25). If the received command is not a gaming state command, the process proceeds to step Su29. If the received command is a gaming state command, the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is set in the RAM 91c (Su26), and based on the set gaming state. It is then determined whether or not the game is a game for which a big bonus end condition is satisfied (Su27). If the game satisfies the big bonus end condition, the ending pattern is set as a control pattern (Su28), the control pattern setting process is ended, and the process returns to the flowchart shown in FIG. If the game is not a game for which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied in the step of Su27, the process proceeds to the step of Su29.

  In step Su29, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to, the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c and the control pattern registered corresponding to the received command are read and set, and the control pattern setting process is performed. To return to the flowchart shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, either one special role or general role is won, or both the special role and general role are Regardless of whether or not the winning combination is a value that increases by +1, the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) A combination with the winning number, that is, a value uniquely assigned to the result of the internal lottery [4 × winning number for special role + winning number for general role] is set, and based on this value, the index area Address [ctrldata_index + 2 × {4 × (special role winning number-1) + general role winning number}] is calculated and stored in the storage area starting from the calculated index area address. The stop control data specified from the index data is selected as the stop control data for the game, and when selecting the stop control data, the winning flag bits for all winnings are selected as before. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process when selecting the stop control data.

  In addition, since the value uniquely assigned to the result of the internal lottery is a value that increases by one, that is, a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), it was won as before. It is possible to calculate the address of the table index for specifying stop control data by simple calculation rather than using a winning flag with 1 assigned to the winning prize, that is, a value that does not increase regularly. It becomes. In particular, in the case where the table index is stored in the index area at regular intervals as in this embodiment, the address of the table index can be calculated by a simpler calculation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers for the special roles and the winning numbers for the general roles are each increased by one, so the values uniquely assigned to the results of the internal lottery from these values are also included. It can be easily calculated.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the address is incremented by +2 from [1000H] regardless of whether any one special role or general role is won, or whether both the special role and general role are won. The combination of the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the winning number of the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen), that is, unique to the result of the internal lottery If the address of the index area assigned to is set, and the stop control data specified from the index data stored in the storage area starting from the address of the index area is selected as the stop control data of the game Well, when selecting stop control data, it is not necessary to check the winning flag bits for all winnings as before. The process for selecting the control data can be simplified.

  Further, since the top address of the index data stored in the index area is a value that increases by two, that is, a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), the index data is equally spaced in the index area. Thus, the value indicated by the index data stored in the index area can be easily grasped.

  In addition, in the case of a challenge bonus, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, it is sufficient to select the stop control data for the challenge bonus unambiguously. However, the process for selecting the stop control data is not complicated.

  Further, when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of the combination is 0, it indicates that the winning of the combination is permitted and is 1 When the abnormal winning determination flag indicating that the winning of the winning combination is not permitted and the value of the bit assigned to each type of the winning combination is 1, it indicates that the winning combination is 1 And a winning symbol flag indicating that the winning combination has not been won, and the value of the zero flag of the F register indicating whether the calculation result is 0, that is, whether the calculation result is 0, is calculated. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning just by referring to it, and it is not necessary to specify the bit of the winning flag of the winning combination that has been established as before and check the value of the specified bit , Simplify the process when determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning be able to.

  Also, during the challenge bonus, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, of the bits allocated for each type of combination, it was allocated to all small combinations, that is, combinations that are uniformly allowed in the challenge bonus. An abnormal winning determination flag having a bit value of 0, that is, an abnormal winning determination data indicating that all the small roles are allowed is set. This makes it possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal prize due to a difference in gaming state.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the value of the bit assigned to each type of combination is 1, it indicates that the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted, and when it is 0, the winning of the corresponding combination is permitted. An internal winning flag indicating that there is no internal winning flag is set in the internal winning flag storing work (iwin_flag) assigned to the RAM 41c, and an operation for inverting 1 and 0 of each bit of the internal winning flag is performed, whereby an abnormal winning determination flag is obtained. Is supposed to create. In other words, once an internal winning flag similar to the conventional winning flag is created, 1 and 0 of each bit of the internal winning flag are inverted to create abnormal winning determination data, so the internal winning flag is abnormally won. It can also be used for purposes other than creating determination data (for example, a test signal to be output to the outside or data for creating a command to be output to the sub-control unit 91).

  Further, if the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, data [0000H] in which all the bit values assigned to each type of the combination are 0 for the internal winning flag based on the result of the internal lottery, and the gaming state is a challenge. If it is a bonus, the logical winning operation is performed on [C000H], that is, all the small combination winning flags set to 1 in the bit values corresponding to cherry and bell, with respect to the internal winning flag based on the result of the internal lottery. Since the result is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag, the data ([0000H] or [C000H]) used to calculate the internal winning flag is changed depending on whether or not the challenge bonus is in effect. By doing this, you can share the process for creating subsequent abnormal winning determination flags and the abnormal winning determination process. .

  Also, in this embodiment, when the game state is other than the challenge bonus, the value stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus), that is, the winning number of the special role that is carried over until winning is set once, [Ctrldata_index + 2 x (4 x special role winning number + general role winning number)] using the value stored in the role storing work (iwin_gen), that is, the winning number of the general role updated every game It is possible to specify the storage address of the index data of the stop control data corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, and the special role is won regardless of whether the special role is carried over. The storage address of the index data of the stop control data can be specified only by performing the calculation using the number and the winning number of the general combination. That is, it is possible to always specify the storage address of the index data of the stop control data by a common method.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a process for determining whether or not the value read from the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value used for the internal lottery is in the proper range. If it is executed for each game and the value read from the set value work is not in the range of 1 to 6, it is controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error, and the progress of the game is disabled. In this embodiment, the value stored in the set value work, that is, the range of the set value that can be selected by the setting change process is a value of 1 to 6, and thus the value stored in the set value work is in the range of 1 to 6. If the value is not, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, a process for determining whether or not the set bet number is a bet number according to the gaming state is executed for each game, and the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state. Control of the error state due to the RAM abnormal error disables the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the number of bets corresponding to each gaming state is determined, but if the game is played with a bet number different from the bet number, is the data stored in the RAM 41c broken? Or, since there is a possibility that an unauthorized program is operating, even if the set bet number is not the bet number according to the game state, the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, that is, when a combination that is not permitted in the game is won, the game is controlled to an error state due to an abnormal winning error and the progress of the game is disabled. Is done. That is, when an unacceptable winning combination wins, there is a possibility that the data is destroyed or an abnormal program is operating, and thus the progress of the game is disabled.

  Once an error state due to a RAM error or an abnormal winning error is controlled, the game cannot be progressed unless the setting change mode is entered and a setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting change operation. The normalized state is not released. In other words, if the set value is not appropriate due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state, or if an unacceptable hand wins, the slot machine The setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation instead of the setting value automatically set by (the setting change operation is generally performed by an employee of the amusement store. Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value), the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined that the winning prize is determined in the internal lottery process and it is determined that the value is not an appropriate setting value, the RAM 41c is controlled to be in a RAM abnormal error state. When the set value stored in the set value work is not an appropriate value (a value in the range of 1 to 6), the winning of the winning is determined with a probability based on the initial value of the set value (for example, set value 1). You may do it. Further, when it is determined that the set bet number is not the bet number according to the gaming state at the time of the internal lottery, it is controlled to the RAM abnormal error state. If the number is not the bet number according to the game state, the bet number according to the game state may be updated to continue the process.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the unused area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is initialized for each game. Therefore, even if an illegal program is stored using the unused area of the RAM 41c, It is possible to prevent unauthorized programs from being resident.

  Further, in this embodiment, the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized for each game in addition to the unused area in the RAM 41c, so that all the unused areas in the RAM 41c at that time are stored for each game. For example, even if it is attempted to store an illegal program using an unused stack area without using an unused area of the RAM 41c, there is no room for the illegal program to reside. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably prevent the unauthorized program from being resident, and for example, to add unauthorized data (such as an address specified by the unauthorized program) to the unused stack area, causing the microcomputer to malfunction when the data is restored. By rewriting the register to an illegal one, the original program Fraud can be prevented that would carry out the operation different from the. Further, by storing illegal data in the unused stack area, an area where the saved data should be stored can be compressed, the stack area overflows, and the micro that configures the main control unit 41 is stored. Problems such as the computer running away can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized for each game. However, at least one of the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized for each game. Anything that can be initialized is acceptable.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the initialization 4 for initializing the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the end of the game, the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c are set for each game. If the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized at least once per game, but the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c is initialized. The timing for performing the conversion may be any timing during one game. For example, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c may be initialized at the start of the game or when a process that is always executed for each game is executed. It may be one that performs the conversion.

  Also, before the start of setting (before transition to the setting change mode), at the end of the big bonus, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of activation, when the four initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, In addition to performing four types of initialization 1 to 4 which are initialized in different areas depending on each initialization condition, any of the four types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and an unused area in the RAM 41c is always Since the unused stack area in the stack area is initialized, it is possible to more reliably prevent the illegal program from being resident.

  In particular, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup, the unused area in the RAM 41c and the unused stack area in the stack area are always initialized. Therefore, the unused area and the unused stack area in the RAM 41c are used. Even when an unauthorized program or unauthorized data is stored, it is possible to prevent the control state of the main control unit 41 from returning based on the data in the RAM 41c while the unauthorized program or the unauthorized data is stored.

  In addition, in the power interruption interrupt processing, after destructive diagnosis data with any bit set to 1 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c, the RAM parity based on all data including the unused area and the unused stack area of the RAM 41c. RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that becomes 0, and RAM parity calculated based on data stored in all areas including the unused area and unused stack area in the RAM 41c at the time of restoration Whether or not destructive diagnosis data is stored, and if the RAM parity is not 0, or even if the RAM parity is 0, the destructive diagnosis data is stored normally. If not, an error occurs due to a RAM error, and the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on. Until the initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed, the progress of the game is impossible. Therefore, the unused area and / or the unused stack area of the RAM 41c at the time of startup. Even if a malicious program is stored in the computer, the malicious program can be found and initialized.

  Further, when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal and a RAM abnormal error state occurs, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c. Even when it is determined that the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned on after that, all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c Since the initialization 1 for initializing is performed, a malicious program that may be stored in the RAM 41c can be surely removed.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, the error state due to the RAM abnormality error is controlled, the progress of the game is disabled, and the error state once caused by the RAM abnormality error. If it is controlled, the state in which the progress of the game is disabled will not be released unless the setting change mode is entered and the setting value is newly selected and set based on the setting changing operation. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the data stored in the RAM 41c, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting value selected and set based on the setting change operation (generally, the setting change Since the operation is performed by an employee of the amusement store, it is ensured that the game is performed based on the setting value selected by the amusement store side), so that the fairness of the game can be achieved.

  Further, the data stored in the RAM 41c is abnormal in most cases when the control cannot be continued due to a malfunction such as a power failure or the CPU 41a running out of control. For this reason, in this embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the data is normal only when the CPU 41a is activated after recovering from these states, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the RAM 41c is normal. The determination can be made only in a situation where there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data. That is, in a situation where there is a low possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the data, it is not necessary to perform the determination, and the load on the CPU 41a can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is calculated and stored so that the result of the exclusive OR operation is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c in the power interruption processing, that is, Since it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal by determining whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on the data stored in all the areas in the RAM 41c at the time of recovery is 0, the determination is made as follows. It can be performed accurately and conveniently.

  In the present embodiment, in the interruption interrupt process, destruction diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit is 1, that is, specific data other than 0 is stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 41c. After that, adjustment data for which the RAM parity is 0 based on all the data in the RAM 41c including the destructive diagnosis data is stored, and in addition to the determination of whether the RAM parity is 0 at the start-up, the destructive diagnosis data Is determined to be normal, and the RAM 41c is determined to be normal on the condition that the RAM parity is 0 and the destructive diagnosis data is also normally stored. The control state is restored based on the data stored in. As a result, when 00H is stored in all areas, that is, when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0 even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is normal by the determination of the RAM parity at startup. If the data in the RAM 41c is cleared to 0, the area in which the destructive diagnosis data is to be stored is also 0, and it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the accuracy of determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c has the correct contents at the time of activation.

  Further, when the CPU 41a determines that the RAM parity is 0 at startup and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normally stored, and determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the destructive diagnosis stored in the RAM 41c. Since the data for destruction diagnosis is still stored in the RAM 41c even after the activation, the data in the RAM 41c is not normal at the next activation, but the data is destroyed. Since diagnostic data is stored, it is possible to prevent erroneous determination as normal.

  Further, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in the data in the RAM 41c and the progress of the game is disabled, a setting value changing operation as a condition for canceling the disabled state of the game is effective. As a result of the transition to the setting change mode (setting change processing), all the areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c are initialized, so that the initial data of the RAM 41c due to the occurrence of an abnormality And initialization of data associated with selection / setting of set values can be performed at once, and unnecessary processing can be omitted. Further, when the CPU 41a is activated, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is ON before determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal. At that time, the setting key switch 37 is ON. If it is determined that there is, the determination as to whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal is not performed, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode, where a new setting value is selected and set. It can be omitted.

  In this embodiment, initialization 1 for initializing all areas except the used stack area of the RAM 41c is performed before shifting to the setting change process. However, along with the shift to the setting change process. Initialization 1 may be performed, for example, after the setting change process is completed, or may be performed when the setting value is confirmed in the setting change process. In this case, since the inconvenience arises when the determined set value is changed, in initialization 1, all areas except the used stack area and the set value work of the RAM 41c are initialized. Become.

  Also, in this embodiment, once controlled to an error state due to a RAM abnormality error or abnormal winning error, the game is disabled until the setting change process is performed. When an error state due to an abnormal winning error occurs, initialization 1 is performed to initialize all areas except the in-use stack area of the RAM 41c, and a set value is set to an initial value (for example, set value 1). The game may be resumed by performing a reset operation in this state.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred, the prohibition of the credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. As long as possible, medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) can be returned even during the period when setting bets is prohibited. Reflecting the will of the player, the medal for the credit stored as owned by the player can be received. Thus, for example, in a game in which a big bonus prize has occurred, before starting the big bonus game accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize, a part of the medal stored as credit is given as a prize (for example, a soft drink or a cigarette). Etc.), but it is possible to receive a medal return reflecting such a player's will.

  In addition, when a big bonus prize is generated, an effect at the time of BB winning indicating that the big bonus prize has occurred is executed, so that the player's interest in shifting to the big bonus accompanying the occurrence of the big bonus prize is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Also, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, and setting of the bet number is prohibited until the ending effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. Can be returned as a credit (including medals used to set the number of bets), so as much as possible to reflect the player's will, It is possible to receive a medal for the credit stored as owned by the player. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  Further, since the ending effect indicating that the big bonus has ended is executed at the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the end of the big bonus can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, even in a game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, even if the game is controlled to be stopped, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled when the end of the game is determined, the game ends, and the store clerk performs a reset operation. Medals stored as credits (including medals used to set bets) are returned even during the period when setting of bets is forbidden until the stoppage state is released Therefore, it is possible to receive medals for credits stored as owned by the player, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end of the big bonus.

  In addition, after a determination is made that the game in which the big bonus prize has occurred is terminated, a power interruption occurs in the period until the BB prize presentation effect waiting time elapses. When the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time, the prohibition on the setting of the bet number is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas the BB prize is won. When power interruption occurs in the stage before the time effect reaches the final stage, and then returns, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the start of the BB winning effect, the power is cut off before the end of the BB winning effect, and after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received during execution of the time effect, the current BB winning effect is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so the BB winning effect is troublesome for the player. The control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant in spite of the fact that the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, and there is a discrepancy between both control states. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and backs up that the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage at the next activation. If so, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the fact that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is backed up, the BB winning effect is returned to the final stage state. Yes. For this reason, when power interruption occurs in a state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed is not executed from the beginning after the return, so the BB winning effect is performed. Can be more effectively prevented from becoming annoying for the player.

  Also, for example, during the period from the determination of the end of the game in which the big bonus winning has occurred until the BB winning stage production waiting time elapses, credit settlement is executed, and medals are being paid out along with this settlement. When a payout error occurs and the payout error is canceled, the bet amount is set when the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error has elapsed from the production waiting time of the BB winning effect. When the prohibition is canceled and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, a payout error occurs in the stage before the BB winning effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled. The BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the bet amount is set and the BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the BB winning effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the BB winning effect is started, the error state is controlled before the BB winning effect is finished, and when the error state is canceled after that, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning. If a new command is received during the execution of the BB winning effect, the effect based on the newly received command is executed after the BB winning effect being executed is cancelled, and the BB winning effect is displayed by the player. Can be prevented, and the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, and there is a discrepancy between the two control states. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, a power interruption occurs after the end of the game for which the end condition of the big bonus has been established, and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses. In the case of returning, when the time excluding the time already passed before power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the prohibition on setting of the bet amount is canceled and the setting of the bet number is permitted On the other hand, if a power interruption occurs at a stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage and then returns, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, when the ending effect is started and then interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then returned from the power interruption, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When the command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player, and the main Although the control state on the control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 backs up whether the ending effect being executed at the time of power interruption is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and if the fact that the ending effect is in the elapsed stage at the next start-up is backed up, If the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage and the fact that the ending effect is in the final stage is backed up, the ending effect is returned to the final stage. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs when the ending effect has reached the final stage, the ending effect that was being executed will not be executed from the beginning after the return, so the ending effect is troublesome for the player. Can be effectively prevented.

  In addition, when the stop function is not set, after the end of the game for which the big bonus end condition is satisfied is determined and the waiting time for the ending effect is over, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production At that point, the prohibition on setting of the number of bets is lifted and the setting of the number of bets is permitted, whereas a payout error occurs at the stage before the ending effect reaches the final stage. When the payout error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning of the elapsed stage. When the number of bets is set and a BET command is received from the main control unit 41 side, the ending effect is canceled at that time, and the effect corresponding to the BET command is executed. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, it is controlled to an error state before the ending effect ends, and when the error state is canceled after that, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a new command is received, the ending effect being executed is canceled and the effect based on the newly received command is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 maintains data indicating whether the BB winning effect being executed at the time of an error is in the elapsed stage or the final stage, and when the error is canceled, the BB winning effect is in the elapsed stage. If data to that effect is maintained, the BB winning effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage, and if the data indicating that the BB winning effect is in the final stage is maintained, the BB winning effect is the final stage. It comes to return in the state of. For this reason, if an error occurs in the state where the BB winning effect has reached the final stage, the BB winning effect that has been executed will not be executed from the beginning after the error is canceled. It is possible to more effectively prevent the BB winning effect from becoming troublesome for the player.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, it is determined that the power interruption occurs in the period until the waiting time for the ending effect is over. When returning, after the time excluding the time already passed before the power interruption has elapsed from the production waiting time of the ending effect, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the stop state is released. The prohibition on the setting of the bet number is also released at that time, and the setting of the bet number is permitted, whereas a power outage occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and then returns The ending effect is executed from the beginning of the progress stage. For this reason, after the ending effect is started, the power is interrupted before the end of the ending effect, and then the ending effect is executed from the beginning when the power is restored from the power interruption. When the command indicating the start of the state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the in-stop notification is executed, so that the ending effect can be prevented from becoming troublesome for the player, Although the control state on the main control unit 41 side is progressing, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, when the stop function is set, after the end of the game in which the big bonus ending condition is satisfied is determined and until the ending effect production waiting time elapses, for example, credit settlement is performed. If a payout error occurs during the payout of medals associated with this settlement, and the payout error is canceled, the time excluding the time already passed before the payout error occurs from the waiting time of the ending production After the elapse of time, the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and when the batting state is released, the prohibition of the setting of the betting number is also released, and the setting of the betting number is permitted. If a payout error occurs before the ending effect reaches the final stage, and the payout error is canceled, the ending effect It is performed from the initial course stages. For this reason, after an ending effect is started, if an error occurs before the ending effect ends, and then the error is canceled, the ending effect is executed from the beginning. When a command indicating the start of the stop state is received, the running ending effect is canceled and the stop notification is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the ending effect from becoming annoying for the player. Even though the control state on the main control unit 41 side is advanced, it is possible to prevent the control state on the sub control unit 91 side from stagnating and causing a discrepancy between the two control states.

  In addition, the time required to execute the progress stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the time until the transition to the final stage is determined as the waiting time for the BB winning effect and the ending effect, that is, the end of the game. Since the set time is shorter than the time when the setting of the bet number is prohibited, the BB winning that was executed after returning to the final stage of the BB winning effect and the ending effect was cut off. Even when the time effect and the ending effect are executed from the beginning, the overlapping period between the period when the BB winning effect and the ending effect are executed and the period until the prohibition of the setting of the bet number is canceled, It is possible to prevent the discrepancy between the control states of both the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 as much as possible.

  In this embodiment, before the BB winning effect and the ending effect waiting time elapses, an error occurs and the BB winning effect and the ending effect are awaited while the error is being controlled. The timing of the production waiting time of the BB prize production and the ending production is resumed from the time when the time measurement is interrupted and the error state is canceled, but waiting for the production of the BB prize production and the ending production is awaited. The time measurement may be performed without interruption even while it is controlled to the error state, and in this way, when the error state is canceled, the prohibition of the setting of the bet amount is canceled, The bet number can be set as early as possible and the bet number set in this state cancels the resumed BB winning effect and ending effect. Therefore, these effects are not bothersome for the player, but the control state on the sub-control unit 91 side is stagnant despite the progress of the control state on the main control unit 41 side, It is possible to prevent a difference in state from occurring.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the voltage drop signal is input to the trigger terminal CLK / TRG, the CPU 41a interrupts the process being executed and executes the power interruption process. In the process including the process for setting the data for destructive diagnosis and the process for calculating and setting the data for adjusting the RAM parity, the process for making it possible to determine whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery or the initial setting of the output port Before performing the conversion, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal is input to the signal input terminal DATA. If the voltage drop signal is also input to the signal input terminal DATA, the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery. If the voltage drop signal is not input to the signal input terminal DATA, the original processing is performed. It is adapted to return.

  That is, the voltage drop signal is input to the two systems of the input unit to the main control unit 41, and the CPU 41a does not perform the power interruption interrupt process when the voltage drop signal is input to one of the input units. Before the process for enabling determination of whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the initialization of the output port, or the like is performed, it is determined again whether or not the voltage drop signal is input to the other input unit. These processes are executed only when a voltage drop signal is also input to the input section of this, and when power failure is detected by mistake, whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of recovery is detected. Since it is possible to prevent the process for enabling the determination and the process such as the initialization of the output port from being performed, the control of the CPU 41a may be interrupted for an unnecessarily long time due to erroneous detection of power interruption. More than necessary Possible to prevent the load is applied to.

  In addition, other interrupts are prohibited during the execution of the power interruption interrupt process and the timer interrupt process (main). For example, the voltage drops during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main). Even when a signal is input, double interruptions do not occur, and it is possible to prevent the processing load on the CPU 41a from increasing and data consistency from being lost. In particular, even if a voltage drop signal is input during the transmission of a command, no interruption occurs and the transmission of the command is not hindered, and the transmission can be completed normally before the CPU 41a stops driving. .

  If the interrupt timing of the power interruption interrupt processing and the interrupt timing of the timer interrupt processing (main) are simultaneous, that is, if interrupt 2 and interrupt 3 occur simultaneously, interrupt 2 Priority is given to the power interruption interrupt process, and if interrupt 2 occurs during the execution of the timer interrupt process (main), the power interruption occurs after the timer interrupt process (main) ends. Since interrupt processing is performed and power interruption interrupt processing is performed at the earliest possible stage while preventing multiple interrupts, it is ensured that power interruption interrupt processing is performed before the CPU 41a stops driving. It can be carried out.

  Further, the CPU 41a can execute four types of interrupts of interrupts 1 to 4, and when interrupts 1 and 4 that are set to unused are generated, the CPU 41a immediately returns to the original process. The unused interrupt processing to be executed is executed. For this reason, even if unused interrupts 1 and 4 occur, the process immediately returns to the process before the interrupt. Therefore, even if an unused interrupt occurs due to noise or the like, the CPU 41a runs out of control. It is possible to prevent such troubles.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 41a transmits a command corresponding to the progress of the game to the effect control board 90, and the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40. Since the CPU 41a does not need to control the production only by transmitting a command, the processing load on the CPU 41a can be reduced and the production can be varied. .

  Further, a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is connected between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 via the effect relay board 80, and the game control board Since the production control board 90 is not directly connected to 40, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input from the command transmission line to the CPU 41a from the outside and affecting the control of the game.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of stop controls in which stop positions (display results) are uniquely determined with respect to the stop operation position (area assigned to the number of steps from the reel reference position). When all reels are rotating in the table, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected, and reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When any reel is already stopped, select a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel. The reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and the gaming state, the internal winning state, the reel stop When all the conditions (and stopped positions (display results) of the stopped reels) are the same, reel stop control is performed based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Therefore, it is necessary to further select any one stop control table from a plurality of stop control tables for one internal winning state by a lottery different from the internal lottery (for example, a lottery for reel control). Therefore, the control for stopping the reel does not become complicated.

  Also, in this embodiment, at the start of reel rotation, a stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each gaming state is selected for all reels, and the selected stop control table is selected. Each time the reels are controlled to stop, each time the reels stop, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stopped position of the stopped reel, that is, any one of the reels is stopped. The stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the stop positions of the stopped reels in the stopped state and the combination of the stop positions of the two stopped reels in the state where any two reels are stopped is selected and selected. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table. For example, any one reel When the reels that are rotating are stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table that is uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel are selected, and the selected stop control table is selected. And when any of the reels is stopped (when two reels are stopped), a new stop control table is not selected and all reels are rotating. You may make it perform stop control of the remaining reels according to the stop control table selected when any one reel stopped.

  In addition, when any one of the reels is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reels, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop position of the stopped reels. Select and perform reel stop control according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop position of the last stopped reel may be selected, and the reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in this embodiment, when any reel is already stopped, it is uniquely determined with respect to the internal winning state, the reel stop state, and the stopped position of the stopped reel for each gaming state. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table provided, but when any reel is already stopped, the internal winning state, the reel stop status and the stop for each game state The reel stop control may be performed in accordance with a stop control table uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the already-reel, and in this way, the gaming state and the internal winning state are the same, Even if the stop position (stop symbol) of the stopped reel is the same, if the stop operation position of the stopped reel is different, the Because there is a stop control table is applied, it can display the results of the reel it more versatile.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. When one of the reels further stops (when two reels stop), the stop control table is not newly selected and all The remaining reels may be controlled to stop according to the stop control table selected when any one of the reels stops while the other reel is rotating.

  Further, when any one of the reels stops, a stop control table uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. Is selected, the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table, and when one of the reels stops (when two reels stop), the internal winning state for each of the gaming states, first It is also possible to select a stop control table that is uniquely defined for the stop operation position of the reel that has stopped last or the reel that has stopped last, and to perform stop control of the reel according to the selected stop control table.

  Also, in this embodiment, when any two reels are stopped, the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is uniquely determined for the spinning reel. The selected stop control table is selected, and the reel stop control is performed according to the selected stop control table. For example, when any two reels are stopped, A stop control table uniquely determined for the internal winning state for each of the states, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, and the stop operation position of the remaining reels of the stopped reels The reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, an internal winning state for each gaming state and a stop control table uniquely determined for the stopped position of the stopped reel are selected for the spinning reel. Then, when any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop operation position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, a stop control table uniquely determined for the combination of the internal winning state for each gaming state and the stop position of the stopped reel is selected and selected. The reel stop control may be performed according to the stop control table.

  In addition, when any one reel is stopped, a stop control table that is uniquely determined with respect to the spinning reel, the internal winning state for each gaming state, and the stop operation position of the stopped reel. When any two reels are stopped, the internal winning state for each gaming state, the stop position of any one of the stopped reels, the remaining reels of the stopped reels A stop control table uniquely determined for the stop operation position may be selected, and reel stop control may be performed according to the selected stop control table.

  Further, in these cases, the stop operation position of the reel that has been stopped is determined in an area in which the 1/2 symbol fluctuates, that is, in a unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates, and is unique to the stop operation position. The reel stop control is performed according to the stop control table that is defined in a specific manner, that is, different stop control tables can be selected for different number of steps within a range where one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if the stop position of the stopped reel is the same, and the timing at which the stop operation is performed is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, it is applied to other reels. Since the stop control table can be changed, the display results of each reel can be further diversified.

  Further, in this embodiment, the number of frames to be drawn (stop position when a stop operation is detected in the range) for each range of a plurality of consecutive steps (in this embodiment, 4 steps each having one symbol change). Since the reel stop control is performed using the uniquely determined stop control table, the capacity of the stop control data for creating the stop control table can be greatly reduced.

  In this embodiment, a stop control table is used in which the number of frames to be drawn is uniquely determined for each unit of the area in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which the number of frames to be drawn (stop position) is uniquely determined for each unit less than the range in which one symbol fluctuates. That is, the reel stop control may be performed using a stop control table in which different stop positions are set for different number of steps within a range in which one symbol fluctuates from the number of steps at which a certain symbol is located at the reference position. In this way, even if it is within the range where one symbol fluctuates, the display result derived by the different timing of the stop operation can be changed. The display result of the reel can be derived in such a manner.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the regular bonus is activated simultaneously with the transition to the big bonus, and during the big bonus, it is determined for each game whether the regular bonus is activated, and the regular bonus is If it is determined that it is not activated, the regular bonus is activated again, so that the regular bonus is always controlled while the big bonus is activated. For this reason, it is only necessary to control the regular bonus while the big bonus is in operation, so that the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified and whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. Since the determination as to whether or not is made, the control program of each game in the big bonus can be made common regardless of whether or not the regular bonus is in operation, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Further, while the big bonus is in operation, the regular bonus is always controlled so that the medals can be increased fastest during the big bonus. Therefore, the regular bonus operates in accordance with the JACIN winning as in the conventional case. It is possible to increase the interest of the player with the shift to the big bonus. In particular, the end condition is met when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a prescribed value (345 in this embodiment) without ending the big bonus at the number of transitions to the regular bonus as in this embodiment. If it is established, the number of net increase in the big bonus can be increased, so that the interest of the player accompanying the shift to the big bonus can be further increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, before determining whether the regular bonus is not activated, it is determined whether the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If there is no regular bonus, it is determined whether or not the regular bonus is inactive. If not, the regular bonus is activated, so the regular bonus will end despite the end of the big bonus. There is no determination for reactivating the device, that is, no unnecessary determination is made.

  In this embodiment, after the operation of the regular bonus starts, the number of games controlled by the regular bonus reaches the specified number of games (12 games in this embodiment) or the specified number of games (8 in this embodiment). ) The game ends when a winning occurs. However, the regular bonus may be ended under only one of the conditions. It may be completed only when it occurs. Alternatively, the total number of medals paid out and the net increase in the regular bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed for setting the number of medals from the total number of medals paid out) may be terminated when the prescribed number is reached. However, the process may be terminated when any one of these conditions is satisfied.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the operation of the big bonus is started, the big bonus is ended when the total number of medals paid out in the big bonus exceeds a specified value (345 in this embodiment). However, the big bonus may be terminated under other conditions, for example, the net increase in the number of medals in the big bonus (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals consumed in setting the number of bets from the total number of medals paid out) When the game reaches the specified value, the number of games controlled by the big bonus reaches the specified number of games, the number of transitions to the regular bonus reaches the specified number, and the regular bonus ends. The Big Bonus end condition is satisfied, or any of these conditions is satisfied. There may be established.

  Also, in this embodiment, during the big bonus, it is determined whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game, but at the same time as the transition to the big bonus, the regular bonus is activated, By activating the regular bonus again at the end of the regular bonus, the regular bonus may always be controlled while the big bonus is active. While it is necessary to control only the regular bonus, the control accompanying the transition to the big bonus can be simplified, and it is not necessary to determine whether the regular bonus is in operation for each game. If the process to reactivate the regular bonus is performed only when the regular bonus ends In prayer, unnecessary processing will not be performed in a state where the control of the regular bonus has not been completed.

  Also, in this case, at the end of the regular bonus, before the regular bonus is activated again, it is determined whether or not the big bonus end condition is satisfied, and the big bonus end condition is satisfied in the determination. If not, it is preferable to activate the regular bonus again. By doing so, the regular bonus is not reactivated even though the big bonus ends immediately.

  In addition, after the transition to the big bonus, the first regular bonus may be triggered by the occurrence of a specific winning or the like, and the subsequent regular bonus may be reactivated at the end of the regular bonus.

  In this embodiment, when the regular bonus is activated, the RB signal is stopped until the output waiting time of the RB signal indicating that the regular bonus is elapsed, and when the output waiting time has elapsed. When the regular bonus is activated continuously during the big bonus, the output of the RB signal stops and the output waiting time elapses in this state. The output of the RB signal is restarted again. For this reason, it is possible to determine that the regular bonus has been temporarily interrupted by an external device that has received an RB signal, for example, whether or not the slot machine is operating normally from the externally output signal. Can be properly implemented with an external device.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to only the special role, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role The storage address of the corresponding number of decision values is registered, and in the internal lottery, the number of decision values of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table is added to the internal random number for the internal lottery acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role is judged. And Betsuyaku and the general role is adapted to be elected at the same time. In other words, by making it possible to specify the range of judgment values for each of the general roles and special roles, and the range of determination values for which the general roles and special roles are selected in duplicate, from one role-specific table. , Special role and general role can be elected at the same time. As a result, even if the general role is won as a result of the game, the winning of the special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so the player's expectation for winning the special role is maintained even in such a situation Can be made.

  In this embodiment, only the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus and cherry can be won at the same time. For example, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus and cherry, A special combination and a plurality of types of general combinations such as a big bonus (1), a big bonus (2), or a challenge bonus and a bell may be simultaneously selected. Furthermore, in this case, the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2), the big bonus (2), or the challenge bonus and the cherry are larger than the determination value range in which the big bonus (1), the big bonus (2) or the challenge bonus and the bell are won simultaneously. Is set so that the range of judgment values to be won at the same time is larger, and the big bonus (1), big bonus (2) or the challenge bonus and the bell win the probability of winning at the same time, the big bonus (1), big bonus (2) Or the probability of winning the challenge bonus and cherry at the same time may be higher, so that when the bell wins the big bonus (1 ), You ’re more likely to win the Big Bonus (2) or Challenge Bonus When the general combination is won, it is possible to have a change in expectation for winning a special combination depending on the type of its general role, it is possible to increase the interest.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the role-specific table, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to only the special role, the storage address of the determination value number corresponding to both the special role and the general role, only the general role Store the storage address for the corresponding number of judgment values, and in the internal lottery, add the number of judgment values for each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the internal random number that was acquired. If the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding only to the special role overflows, the winning of only the special role is judged, and the result of addition with the number of judgment values corresponding to both the special role and the general role overflows. In such a case, the winning of both the special role and the general role is judged, and if the addition result with the number of judgment values corresponding to only the general role overflows, the winning of only the general role should be judged. And special The role can be elected at the same time as the role and the general role, but the role table for the general role where the storage address of the general role is registered and the special role where the storage address of the judgment value number of the special role is registered In the internal lottery, for the same random number for internal lottery, the lottery of the general role that refers to the role table for the general role and the special role that refers to the role-specific table for the special role The lottery is separately performed, and the number of judgment values stored in the address area registered in the role table for general roles and the address area registered in the role table for special roles are stored. By making it possible to specify from the number of judgment values the range of judgment values that the general and special roles are each won separately and the range of judgment values that are won by the general and special roles in duplicate. And general roles won simultaneously Even if such a configuration is adopted, even if a general role is won as a result of the game, winning of a special role with a higher advantage than the general role is not denied, so this situation In this case, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for winning the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the storage address of the judgment value number of each combination and combination of combinations registered in the combination table may differ depending on the set value, but regardless of the set value. For the combination and combination of combinations that have the same winning probability, the number of determination values is stored in common regardless of the set value. By storing the number of determination values in common in this way, the storage capacity required for that is reduced. However, in the role-specific table, the number of determination values stored at different addresses even if the target combination or combination of the internal lottery is the same and the number of determination values referenced according to the set value is different. May be the same.

  In general, in the development stage, it is assumed that the simulation is performed while adjusting the number of judgment values (that is, the winning probability) according to the set value (that is, adjusting the winning probability of the internal lottery) for at least some of the roles. Yes. As the initial number of determination values, a different number of determination values is registered according to the set value. However, as a result of adjustment by simulation, the number of determination values when the set values are different may be the same. Although the same number of judgment values was registered as the initial number of judgment values according to the set value, the number of judgment values registered from the beginning may be used as it is depending on the result of simulation (result of simulation). The number of judgment values different from the initial value, that is, the number of judgment values may differ depending on the set value). Then, the number of determination values obtained with an appropriate result in the simulation in each case is selected as the number of determination values to be set in the mass production model.

  Here, even if the number of determination values adjusted by the simulation is the same regardless of the set value, the number of determination values is stored in the ROM 41b with the same address assignment as that in the development stage. It can be used as a model for mass production. For this reason, it is not necessary to change the method for storing the number of judgment values in the model for mass production from the model for development, so that development from the initial design stage to the model for mass production can be easily performed. Become.

  In addition, the internal lottery adds the judgment value number of each combination or combination of combinations referenced from the combination table to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and depending on whether the result of the addition overflows, It is assumed that each winning combination is judged. For this reason, an internal lottery can be performed using the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations as it is. In addition, when generating the winning determination table before the actual winning determination is performed, the loop processing is required twice. However, according to this embodiment, the loop processing in the lottery processing may be performed only once. Thus, the processing efficiency in the entire lottery process is high.

  In the present embodiment, the random number for internal lottery acquired by the random number acquisition process is not used as it is from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43 but is used after being processed by software. Yes. The random number generation circuit 42 generates a random number by updating at a high speed at the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a. However, in the random number for internal lottery after processing by software, the periodicity of the update is increased by the processing. It will be lost.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, since the number of judgment values corresponding to each combination is sequentially added to the random value for the internal lottery, the combination of each combination or combination is won as shown in FIG. The value of the random number for internal lottery becomes solidified. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from aiming as much as possible by losing the periodicity of the random numbers for internal lottery by processing by software and varying the values.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 to be synchronized with the process performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  On the other hand, the processing of the random number by software only needs to replace the upper byte and the lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 by the sampling circuit 43. Therefore, even a relatively large random number of 16 bits does not increase the load required for processing necessary to lose periodicity and can be easily acquired. Since a large random number can be acquired in this way, the probability setting in the internal lottery can be finely performed.

  Moreover, the frequency of the pulse signal generated by the pulse generation circuit 42a for updating the values of the counters 42b and 42c of the random number generation circuit 42 is higher than the frequency of the operation clock of the CPU 41a, and is not an integral multiple. For this reason, it becomes difficult for the update of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 to be synchronized with the process performed by the CPU 41a. In addition, by increasing the frequency of the pulse signal of the pulse generation circuit 42a, the update speed of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42 can be made extremely fast.

  As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

  Below, the modification of the said Example 1 is demonstrated.

  First, a modified example regarding the abnormal winning determination will be described.

  57 to 59 are diagrams showing modifications of the abnormal winning determination process shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, in the internal winning flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1 and the values of the other bits are set to 0. In the winning symbol flag, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0. Then, all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted, and a logical product (AND) with the winning symbol flag is calculated, and when the result becomes 00H (all bits are 0), other than the regular winning, other than 00H (any one) When the bit becomes 1), it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57, as in the first embodiment, after calculating the logical product (AND) of the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the internal winning flag and the winning symbol flag, All the bits of the above are further inverted, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), it is determined that the regular winning is achieved, and when the result is other than FFH (any bit is 0), it is determined that the abnormal winning is achieved. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 58, after calculating the logical sum (OR) of the internal winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the winning symbol flags, all the bits of the calculated value are further inverted, and the result It may be determined that the regular winning is achieved when 00 becomes 00H (all bits are 0), and the abnormal winning is achieved when other than 00H (any bit is 1). In this case, as in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormal winning by merely checking the value of the zero flag of the F register indicating whether the calculation result is 00H, that is, whether the calculation result is 0 or not. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the logical sum (OR) of the internal winning flag and the value obtained by inverting all the bits of the winning symbol is calculated, and when the result becomes FFH (all bits are 1), It may be determined that the prize is abnormal, when the prize is other than FFH (any bit is 0).

  As described above, also in the modified examples of the abnormal winning determination shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the logical winning operation or logical product of the internal winning flag or the value obtained by inverting the internal winning flag and the winning design flag or the value obtained by inverting the winning design flag is performed. It is possible to determine whether the result of the calculation is a value other than 0, or whether it is a value other than 1, and it is possible to determine whether or not it is an abnormal winning. It is not necessary to bother identifying the winning flag bit of the winning combination and confirming the value of the identified bit, so that the process for determining whether or not an abnormal winning is made can be simplified.

  In the case of FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, if all the bits of the winning design flag set in accordance with winning are inverted in advance, that is, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is 0, and the other bits If the winning symbol flag is set so that the value of 1 becomes 1, the step of inverting all the bits of the winning symbol flag in the abnormal winning determination process becomes unnecessary.

  In the case of FIGS. 57 and 59, when determining whether or not the calculation result is FFH, 1 is added to the calculation result, and when the value after the addition overflows, it is determined that the calculation result is FFH. When it does not overflow, it is preferable to determine that the operation result is other than FFH. In such a case, it is only necessary to check the value of the carry flag in the F register indicating whether or not the operation result has overflowed. It is possible to determine whether or not the prize is abnormal.

  On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, the internal winning flag has a bit value corresponding to the internal winning combination set to 1 and the other bits have a value of 0, and the winning symbol flag indicates the winning combination. A description will be given of a modified example in which an abnormal winning is determined without inverting all the bits in any flag when the value of the corresponding bit is 1 and the values of the other bits are 0.

  In this modification, the internal winning flag is applied as an abnormal winning determination flag. Then, from the value of each bit of the internal winning flag, the value of the bit at the same position in the winning symbol flag is subtracted, and on the condition that the subtraction result does not become a negative number in all the bits, whether or not it is an abnormal winning Determine whether. For example, when the value of the 0th bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the 0th bit of the internal winning flag to determine whether the subtraction result is a negative number, Then, the value of the first bit of the winning symbol flag is subtracted from the value of the next bit, that is, the first bit of the internal winning flag, and the result is judged, and finally, from the 0th bit to the 15th bit. In all cases, it is determined that there is no abnormal winning on the condition that the subtraction result is not a negative number.

  In such a case, it is possible to determine whether or not there is an abnormal winning only by confirming the value of the sign flag of the F register indicating whether or not the calculation result has become a negative number. Further, as in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it is possible to determine whether the internal winning flag or the winning symbol flag is an abnormal winning without inverting the bit.

  Next, a modification of the method for setting abnormal winning determination data from the result of the internal lottery will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the number / flag conversion table (FIG. 13) storing the value of the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number is converted into the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number, and the internal winning flag is further changed. The abnormal winning determination data is set by inverting it. For example, an abnormality corresponding to the winning number using the number / flag conversion table in which the value of the abnormal winning determination data corresponding to the winning number is stored. It may be possible to directly convert to winning determination data. In such a case, an error is detected by a simple procedure by simply referring to the data stored in the number / flag conversion table corresponding to the winning number. A winning determination flag can be set.

  Further, in this case, in addition to the abnormal winning determination data corresponding to the winning number in the number / flag conversion table, the abnormal winning determination flag for the challenge bonus is stored, so that when not in the challenge bonus, The data stored in the number / flag conversion table is referred to corresponding to the winning number, and during the challenge bonus, only the abnormal winning determination flag for the challenge bonus stored in the number / flag conversion table is referred to. With this simple procedure, the abnormal winning determination flag can be set.

  In addition, the internal winning flag may be calculated by calculation using the value of the winning number, and the abnormal winning determination data may be set by inverting the internal winning flag.

  FIGS. 60A to 60D are diagrams illustrating an example of a method for converting the result of the internal lottery into an internal winning flag using calculation.

  FIG. 60A and FIG. 60B show the configurations of the winning numbers for the general roles and the winning numbers for the special roles, respectively, which are the same as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 60C shows the configuration of the internal winning flag, and the position of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, the 0th bit corresponds to the big bonus (1), the 1st bit corresponds to the big bonus (2), the 3rd bit corresponds to the challenge bonus, the 8th bit is cherry, the 9th bit is bell, 10 bits correspond to replay. The third to seventh and 11th to 15th bits do not correspond to any combination. And the position of the bit corresponding to each combination is a position corresponding to the winning number.

  That is, the cherry with the winning number of 1 for the general role corresponds to the first bit of the upper 8 bits in the internal winning flag, and the bell with the winning number of the general role of 2 corresponds to the 2nd bit of the upper 8 bits in the internal winning flag. Correspondingly, the bell whose general combination winning number is 3 corresponds to the third bit of the upper 8 bits in the internal winning flag. In addition, the big bonus (1) with the special winning number 1 corresponds to the first bit of the lower 8 bits in the internal winning flag, and the big bonus (2) with the special winning number 2 is the internal winning flag. The challenge bonus whose special winning number is 3 corresponds to the third bit of the lower 8 bits in the internal winning flag.

  FIG. 60 (d) is a flowchart showing the flow of processing for storing the internal winning flag.

  First, based on the winning number of the general role shown in FIG. 60A, the steps of processing Si101 to Si108 for storing the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag shown in FIG. 60C are performed. Based on the winning number of the special role shown in 60 (b), the steps of processing Si109 to Si116 for storing the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag shown in FIG. 60 (c) are performed.

  The CPU 41a first clears the H register (stores 00H) (Si101), stores the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) (the winning number of the general combination) in the A register (Si102), and proceeds to the step of Si103.

  In the step of Si103, the logical sum (OR) of the A registers storing the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculation result is 0 in the step of Si104. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is 0, the process proceeds to step Si109. If the calculation result is not 0, that is, the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) If the value is 1 to 3 other than 0, the process proceeds to step Si105.

  In the step of Si105, 01H is set in the H register, and the process jumps to Si107.

  In the step of Si107, 1 is subtracted from the A register, and it is determined whether or not the calculation result is 0 in the step of Si108. If the calculation result is 0, the process proceeds to step Si109, and if the calculation result is not 0, the process proceeds to step Si106.

  In the step of Si106, the value of the H register is shifted to the left by one bit. The step of Si 106 is performed [iwin_gen value-1] times until the value of the A register in which the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen) is stored is 0 by the steps of Si 107 and Si 108. If the value of the stored work (iwin_gen) is 1, it is executed 0 times, if it is 2, once if it is 3, and twice if it is 3.

  As a result, the H register stores 01H if the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is 1, 02H if 2, and 04H if 3. This is the value of the upper 8 bits of the internal winning flag corresponding to the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen). When the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) is 0, 00H set in Si101 is stored in the H register.

  Similarly, the values of the lower 8 bits of the internal winning flag corresponding to the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) (special winning number) are stored in the L register by the steps of Si109 to Si116.

  Finally, the process proceeds to step Si117, and the value of the HL register is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag).

  As described above, even when the number / flag conversion table (FIG. 13) is not stored in the ROM 41b, only the calculation is performed using the value of the winning number (the winning number for the special role and the winning number for the general role). An internal winning flag is set, and this internal winning flag is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag).

  An abnormal winning determination flag can be obtained by performing an operation of inverting 1 and 0 of each bit of the internal winning flag acquired in this way. Therefore, in this way, both the internal winning flag and the abnormal winning determination flag can be set by simply performing the calculation using the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen). In addition to the creation of table data, there is no need for table data that defines the correspondence between the results of the internal lottery and the internal winning flag or abnormal winning determination flag, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Also, in the above, the internal lottery result is first converted into an internal winning flag by calculation, and then an abnormal winning determination flag is set by performing an inversion operation. However, the internal lottery result is directly calculated by abnormal calculation. It may be possible to convert it to a judgment flag. In this case as well, an abnormal winning judgment is made simply by performing an operation using the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen). In addition to the ability to create a flag for the game, it is not necessary to have table data that defines the correspondence between the results of the internal lottery and the abnormal winning determination flag, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  Next, modified examples such as a method for storing the number of determination values used for the internal lottery and the lottery method for the internal lottery will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the determination value number storage area of the RAM 41c in which the number of determination values used for the internal lottery is stored uses a 2-byte area to store the determination value number in each case. However, in a general slot machine, the number of judgment values for special roles is not often set to exceed 255 in any gaming situation. As described above, for those that do not need to set the number of determination values exceeding 255, the number of determination values may be stored using only a 1-byte area.

  Further, in the first embodiment, some of the determination values that are common regardless of the set value are stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6, but the number of determination values is the set value. Regardless, the common items can also be stored individually for each of the setting values 1 to 6. Further, if the number of determination values is common regardless of the set value, all of them can be stored in common for all of the set values 1 to 6.

  In the first embodiment, the number of determination values is stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 or is stored individually for each of the setting values 1 to 6. However, it is assumed that the number of determination values is not stored in common for all of the setting values 1 to 6 (the common flag for the setting value is not set). About 4-6, the number of judgment values can also be made common.

  In the first embodiment, the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) for the same combination or combination of combinations at the same set value is different for each gaming state (state number). Was stored in. That is, the same combination or combination of combinations with the same set value is stored separately even if the number of determination values referred to according to the gaming state (state number) is the same, but the gaming state (state number) Regardless of the combination of combinations or combinations of combinations that have the same winning probability regardless, the storage address of the judgment value number is shared, or the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value and gaming state (state number) For the combination or combination of combinations, the storage address of the determination value number may be made common, and by storing the determination value number in common in this way, the storage capacity required for this is reduced. It will be enough.

  In the first embodiment, the number of determination values acquired according to the set value or the like is sequentially added to the internal lottery random value. However, the value of the internal lottery random number acquired from the acquired determination value number. It is also possible to sequentially subtract from the result of subtraction and use the result of subtraction as a new random value for internal lottery. When the number of determination values is subtracted from the random number value for internal lottery, it can be determined whether or not an overflow has occurred in the subtraction result (here, the subtraction result becomes negative).

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the internal lottery, when the number of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations corresponding to the gaming state is sequentially added to the acquired random number for internal lottery, and the addition result overflows The combination or combination of combinations was determined to be winning. On the other hand, a winning determination table that defines a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination as winning according to the number of determination values for each combination or combination according to the gaming state is determined for each game. The internal lottery may be performed by comparing the created and acquired random number value for internal lottery with the range of determination values of each combination or combination of combinations. In addition, a winning determination table in which a range of determination values for determining each combination or combination of combinations as winning is stored in the ROM 41b in advance, and the acquired random value for internal lottery is used as a range of determination values for each combination. It is good also as what performs an internal lottery by comparing with.

  In the above embodiment, the game can be started only by setting 3 as the number of bets in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, even in the normal gaming state, the game can be started by setting 1 as the bet number, and further, the game can be started by setting 2 as the bet number. Also good. As a result, when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of the small role in the internal lottery is lowered as compared with the case where 3 is set as the bet number, and the small role is won The number of paid out medals can be increased. For example, when 3 is set as the bet number in the normal gaming state, the winning probability of Bell is 1 / 4.82 and the payout number is 7, but when 1 or 2 is set as the bet number, The winning probability may be lower than 1 / 4.82 and the payout number may be more than seven. Further, the winning probability of the bell and the number of payouts may be changed when 1 is set as the bet number and when 2 is set.

  Next, a modified example of the method for acquiring a random number for internal lottery will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the entire high-order byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is replaced with the low-order byte, and the whole low-order byte is replaced with the high-order byte. On the other hand, data of a specific bit out of random number bits extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be replaced with data of other bits. Alternatively, the random number value extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be directly acquired as a random number for internal lottery. Furthermore, it may be processed into a random number for internal lottery by a method different from that in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of a first modification of the processing until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in the first modified example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the HL register, which is a 16-bit general-purpose register included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the HL register, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal refresh register (R register) as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register to the value of the upper byte of the HL register (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The value of the lower byte of the HL register (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) is left as it is. Then, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the HL register at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of the processing until the CPU 41a processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 into a random number for internal lottery by software. Also in this example, the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the HL register which is a 16-bit general-purpose register included in the CPU 41a.

  When the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 is stored in the HL register, the CPU 41a further extracts the value of the internal R register as a processing random number. The CPU 41a adds the processing random number extracted from the R register to the value of the upper byte of the HL register (the value extracted from the upper counter 42c). The processing random number extracted from the R register is also added to the lower byte value (the value extracted from the lower counter 42b) of the HL register. Then, the CPU 41a uses the value stored in the HL register at this time as a random number for internal lottery, and sequentially adds the number of determination values thereto.

  In the first and second modified examples described above, the value of the R register is extracted as a random number for processing, and the higher byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 (lower byte in the second modified example) In addition, the random number is processed. The random number processing applied here includes at least processing for adding a processing random number to the upper byte. Thereby, the variation of the random numbers for internal lottery can be increased, and the player can prevent the aiming as much as possible.

  Further, since the processing random numbers are extracted from the R register, no special configuration is required as means for generating the processing random numbers. In addition, since the value of the R register is updated every time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction and the update interval is not constant, a random number with high randomness can be extracted as a processing random number. And since the randomness of the processing random number is high, the randomness of the random number for internal lottery generated using the random number is also high.

  In the first and second modified examples, the value extracted from the R register is added to the upper byte (and the lower byte) of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. Values that are periodically updated by software may be added. Further, instead of adding a value extracted from the R register (or a value replacing the R register), a logical operation such as subtraction, logical sum, or logical product may be performed.

  Further, bit replacement such as replacement of the upper byte and the lower byte shown in the above embodiment may be used in combination with the first and second modifications. Also in the first and second modified examples, the interruption to the CPU 41a is prohibited in order to prevent the contents of the HL register from being rewritten until the processing is completed after the random number is extracted from the random number generation circuit 42. Will be.

  In the second modification, processing random numbers to be added to the upper byte and lower byte of the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit 42 may be separately extracted from the R register at different timings. Separately prepare the processing random number to be added to the upper byte and the processing random number to be updated to the lower byte. Means for extracting may be provided. In this case, one of the means for updating the processing random number for the upper byte and the means for updating the processing random number for the lower byte can be constituted by the R register.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to the case where the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 42, that is, the random number extracted by the hardware random number function is processed by software has been described. However, the random number processing by the software described above may be applied to random numbers that are periodically updated by software. For example, the CPU 41a sends an instruction to the second microcomputer to extract a random number periodically updated by a timer interrupt or the like in a second microcomputer different from the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41, and I It can be input to the CPU 41a via the / O port 41d and stored in the HL register. The function of the second microcomputer may be included in the microcomputer that constitutes the main control unit 41. Also in this case, the random number value obtained after processing can be varied, and the effect of preventing the player from aiming can be achieved.

  In the above, the extracted random number and the processed random number are stored in the general-purpose register (HL register) provided in the CPU 41a, and in the internal lottery, the judgment value number of each role is sequentially added to the value stored in the general-purpose register. However, a random number after processing, that is, an acquired random number may be stored in the RAM 41c, and the number of determination values of each combination may be sequentially added to the value stored in the RAM 41c.

  Next, a modified example of the reel stop control will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the reel stop control is performed in accordance with the plurality of stop control tables in which the number of frames to be pulled in with respect to the stop operation position is determined. However, the stop control is performed on the plurality of stop position specifying tables in which the stop positions with respect to the stop operation position are determined. Instead of the table, when the stop operation is detected, the stop position specifying table may be referred to and the reel may be controlled to stop at the stop position specified corresponding to the stop operation position.

  Also, by determining the stop priority with respect to the stop position, a plurality of stop priority tables that determine the stop position with respect to the stop operation position (number of steps from the reel reference position) are used instead of the stop control table. Is detected, the stop priority table is referenced, the stop priorities of all stop positions within the retractable range (up to 5 frames) from the stop operation position are compared, and the stop position with the highest stop priority is Control to stop the reels may be performed.

  As a result of the internal lottery, when a stop operation is performed by selecting the number of drawing frames determined for the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel) In addition, when the target stop position is located within the range of the number of pull-in frames selected, pull-in control is performed to pull in the stop position and stop, so that the stop position where the stop is prohibited is not stopped. It is also possible to perform kicking control (so-called control method control) in which the stop position is pulled in and stopped.

  In addition, as a result of the internal lottery, a stop control pattern determined corresponding to the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel or the stop operation position of the stopped reel) is selected, and the reels are selected according to the stop control pattern. As long as the stop control is performed, the reel stop control by the stop control table, the reel stop control by the stop priority table, the reel stop control by the pull-in control and the kicking control may be performed in combination, For example, the reel stop control may be performed by using the stop control table only for the reel that has stopped first, and the reel stop control may be performed by pull-in control and kick-off control for the other reels.

  In the first embodiment, the stop control data is uniquely determined for the internal lottery result. For example, a plurality of stop control data is determined for one internal lottery result. In this case, any one stop control data may be selected by lottery or the like.

  Next, a modified example of the bet number setting and credit settlement prohibition control will be described.

  Further, in the first embodiment, after the game ends at the time of the big bonus winning, after the game ends at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is disabled during the period until the BB winning effect waiting time elapses after the game ends. Until the ending waiting time elapses, after the ending waiting time elapses at the end of the big bonus when the stop function is enabled, until the stop state is released by the reset operation by the store clerk In this period, setting of the bet number is prohibited, but any bet number may be set as long as at least one of these periods is prohibited.

  Further, although the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has a stop function, it may be applied to a slot machine that does not have a stop function.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the waiting time for the effect at the BB winning effect and the waiting time for the effect at the BB end effect may be the same time or different times.

  In the first embodiment, only the big bonus winning is applied as the transition winning in which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited for a certain period of time (the waiting time for the production at the time of the BB winning) at the time of winning. (Challenge bonus winning etc.) may be applied, and may be applied to a plurality of special roles. Furthermore, even for special roles of the same type, among them, there are multiple types of big bonus prizes and challenge bonus prizes (for example, one of a combination of symbols constituting the bonus prize and a color of a symbol constituting the bonus prize). Or if the two are different, or if the bonus consists of different bonus controls, such as the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Sometimes the setting of the number of bets may be prohibited for a certain period. Further, the period during which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited at the time of winning may differ depending on the type of special role (big bonus winning and challenge bonus winning), big bonus winning or challenge bonus winning. Then, an effect at the time of bonus winning having a different execution time may be executed according to a period during which setting of the bet number is prohibited.

  In the first embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special gaming state in which the setting of the bet amount is prohibited for a certain period (ending time for producing the ending effect) at the end, but other special gaming states ( Challenge bonus etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are more than one type of big bonus or challenge bonus (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be set to be prohibited for a certain period at the end. Further, the period during which the setting of the number of bets is prohibited at the end may differ depending on the type of special gaming state (big bonus and challenge bonus) and the type of big bonus or challenge bonus. And you may make it perform the ending effect from which execution time differs according to the period when the setting of the number of bets is prohibited.

  Further, in the first embodiment, only the big bonus is applied as the special game state controlled to the stop state in which the setting of the bet number is prohibited until the reset operation is performed after the end, but other special games A state (challenge bonus, etc.) may be applied, or may be applied to a plurality of special game states. Furthermore, even in the same type of special gaming state, there are more than one type of big bonus or challenge bonus (for example, combinations of symbols constituting a bonus prize that triggers the transition to the bonus, timing for transitioning to the bonus If one or both of the colors of the symbols constituting the bonus prize are different, or the number of medals that can be expected during the bonus, etc. Only a specific bonus may be controlled to be stopped after completion.

  Further, in the first embodiment, even in a game in which the big bonus end condition is satisfied, when the end of the game is determined, the prohibition of credit settlement is canceled and the setting of the bet amount is prohibited. Credit payment can also be made at (Ending Effect Waiting Time). For example, in a game in which a big bonus ending condition is satisfied, the elapsed time since the end of the game is determined waits for the ending effect. When the time is reached, the game is controlled so that it is stopped, and both the setting of bets and the settlement of credits are prohibited until the elapsed time from the end of the game is reached the waiting time for producing the ending effect. When the elapsed time reaches the production waiting time for the ending production, only the prohibition of credit settlement may be canceled. As a result, in the game where the big bonus end condition is satisfied, the credit cannot be settled until the elapsed time after the end of the game is determined reaches the ending effect production waiting time. Since it is possible to settle credits without waiting for the release of the stop state, the medal for the credits stored as owned by the player should be returned, reflecting the player's will as much as possible. Can receive. This makes it possible to receive a medal return reflecting the will of the player who wants to end the game immediately after the end waiting time for the ending effect has elapsed, particularly when the big bonus ends.

  In the first embodiment, the end of the game is determined by the end of the game end process. However, the game is substantially ended by the end of the medal payout. It may be determined whether or not the end of is completed. In other words, the credit can be settled from the end of the payout process.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the timer common to the production wait time timer for timing the production waiting time for the BB winning production and the timer count for the production wait time for measuring the production waiting time for the ending production is used. Although a counter is used, these timer counters may be provided separately.

  Next, a modified example of the initialization of the RAM 41c will be described.

  In the first embodiment, when the CPU 41a initializes the RAM 41c, the initialization table of the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address and initialization size corresponding to one of initializations 1 to 4 are set according to the initialization conditions. , Set the pointer to the start address, set the initialization size, clear the area of the corresponding address by 1 byte from the initialization address where the pointer is set, and initialize each time 1 byte is cleared The area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization condition is initialized by executing the process of decrementing the size by 1 and advancing the pointer by 1 until the initialization size becomes 0. The area to be initialized is set as a continuous address area, and the initialization table indicates one of initializations 1 to 4 according to the initialization condition. The start address and the end address common to all of initializations 1 to 4 are registered, and the CPU 41a refers to the initialization table when initializing the RAM 41c, and initializes according to the initialization condition. The start address corresponding to any one of 1 to 4 is acquired, the pointer is set to the start address, and the area of the corresponding address is cleared to 0 by 1 byte from the initialization address to which the pointer is set, and 1 byte is cleared. Each time the pointer is advanced, the area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization condition may be initialized by executing the process of advancing the pointer until the end address area common to the initializations 1 to 4 is cleared. .

  In this case, each time 1 byte is cleared, it is determined whether the address indicated by the pointer is the end address. If the address is the end address, the initialization may be terminated. The initialization byte number from the start address to the common end address is calculated and set, and every time 1 byte is cleared from the start address, the initialization byte number is decremented by 1 and the pointer is advanced by 1. It is preferable that the process is executed until the number reaches zero, and it is determined that the end address area has been cleared when the number of initialization bytes reaches zero, and the initialization is terminated. This is because the process of determining whether the number of initialization bytes is 0 is higher than the process of comparing the address indicated by the pointer and the end address for each byte.

  FIG. 63A is a diagram illustrating a modification of the storage area of the RAM 41c, FIG. 63B is a diagram illustrating a modification of the initialization table, and FIG. 64 is a modification of initialization 1. It is a flowchart to show.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (a), in this modification, the storage area of the RAM 41c is 7E00 (H), the set value work, special work, important work, non-saved work, general work, unused area, unused. The stack area is allocated in the order of the stack area in use. For this reason, even if any of initialization 1, 2, and 4 is performed, the area | region initialized is a continuous address area | region. Specifically, the areas initialized in the initialization 1 are all areas except the in-use stack area, that is, set value work, special work, important work, unsaved work, general work, unused area, unused stack. These areas are continuous address areas from 7E00 (H) to the stack pointer. The areas initialized in the initialization 2 are general work, unused area, and unused stack area, and these areas are continuous address areas from 7E53 (H) to the stack pointer. The areas initialized in the initialization 4 are an unused area and an unused stack area. These areas are continuous address areas from 7F05 (H) to the stack pointer. In initialization 2, general work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. In initialization 3, non-saved work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. The unused area and the unused stack area that are initialized in the initialization 3 are continuous address areas, but the non-saved work is a non-continuous address area.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (b), in the initialization table applied in this modification, start addresses are registered corresponding to initializations 1 to 4, and end addresses common to initializations 1 to 4. Is registered. In addition, since the initialization 3 is an address area where non-saved work is not continuous, the initialization size is registered corresponding to the start address of the non-saved work.

  Next, a modification of the initialization 1 executed by the CPU 41a will be described based on the flowchart shown in FIG.

  In this initialization 1, first, the initialization address in the ROM 41b is referred to, and the start address registered corresponding to the initialization 1 is read (Sr1001). Then, a pointer is set at the read start address (7E00 (H)) (Sr1002). Next, the initialization address common to the initializations 1 to 4 is read by referring to the initialization table of the ROM 41b (Sr1003). Then, the number of bytes from the start address (7E00 (H)) read in Sr1001 to the end address (stack pointer) read in Sr1003 is calculated (Sr1004), and the number of bytes in the area for initializing the calculated number of bytes is set. (Sr1005). Then, a RAM clear process for clearing data from the start address set in Sr1002 over the number of bytes set in Sr1005 is executed (Sr1006), and when the RAM clear process is completed, the initialization 1 is completed. Return to.

  Further, the initialization 2 and 4 are almost the same as the initialization 1 shown in FIG. 64, and the initialization 2 or initialization 4 start address registered in the initialization table is acquired. Then, the number of bytes from the start address to the common end address is calculated, and the data is cleared over the calculated number of bytes from the start address. In the modification of initialization 3, first, the start address and initialization size of the non-saved work registered in the initialization table are acquired, and after the data is cleared from the start address over the number of bytes corresponding to the initialization size, Get the start address of the unused area and unused stack area registered in the initialization table, calculate the number of bytes from the start address to the common end address, and clear the data over the calculated number of bytes from the start address Perform the process.

  According to the modification of the initialization of the RAM 41c as described above, for a plurality of initialization conditions, only the start address corresponding to the initialization table and the end address common to the plurality of initialization conditions are set. Because it is possible to initialize areas corresponding to multiple initialization conditions without individually setting end addresses corresponding to multiple initialization conditions, the program capacity for performing multiple types of initialization Can be reduced.

  Next, a modified example such as an abnormality determination of data stored in the RAM 41c will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 0 in the power interruption processing, and it is determined whether or not the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 0 at the time of restoration. The RAM parity adjustment data is stored so that the RAM parity of the RAM 41c becomes 1 in the power interruption interrupt process, and the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is 1 at the time of recovery. By determining whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal, it may be determined. Further, the checksum (exclusive OR of the data stored in the corresponding area) of all areas of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing, and is stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, the RAM 41c is restored. If the result is 00H, it is determined that the data in the RAM 41c is normal, and if it is not 00H, the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal. You may make it determine with it.

  If the checksum is stored normally in the power interruption processing, the checksum of the area excluding the specific area and the data stored in the specific area (the checksum calculated at the time of power interruption) ) Should take the same value, and if the checksum of the area excluding the specific area matches the data stored in the specific area, the result of calculating the exclusive OR of both data is This is because the result of calculating the checksum of all the areas including the specific area where the checksum of the RAM 41c is stored is 00H, so that the data of the RAM 41c can be determined to be normal.

  Even in this case, in the power interruption interrupt processing, before the checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data (for example, 5AH) in which any bit is 1 is stored in a predetermined address, and at the time of recovery, In addition to determining whether or not the checksum is 00H, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The condition is that the checksum is 00H and the data for destructive diagnosis is also normal. In addition, it is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Even if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, if 00H is stored in all areas, it is determined to be normal by the checksum determination at the time of startup, but any bit is set to 1 at the time of power failure. After destructive diagnostic data is stored, the checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area. In addition to checking the checksum at startup, the destructive diagnostic data is also checked. Even when all the areas are cleared to 0 and the checksum is 00H and is determined to be normal, the destruction diagnosis data does not match the value stored at the time of the power failure and is determined to be abnormal. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the abnormality of the data stored in.

  In the above, the RAM parity or checksum of the RAM 41c is calculated in the power interruption processing and stored in the RAM 41c, and whether or not the RAM parity calculated based on all areas of the RAM 41c at the time of restoration is 0. Or whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal based on whether or not the checksum calculated based on all the areas of the RAM 41c is 00H. In the interruption interrupt processing, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is determined. Alternatively, a checksum is calculated and stored in a specific area, and at the time of recovery, a RAM parity or checksum excluding the specific area of the RAM 41c is calculated and compared with the RAM parity or checksum stored in the specific area. Data in RAM 41c is normal depending on whether the results match Whether may be determined. In this case as well, as described above, before the RAM parity or checksum is calculated, the destructive diagnosis data in which any bit is 1 is stored at a predetermined address. In addition to determining whether or not the sums match, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, the RAM parity and checksum match, and the destructive diagnostic data is also normal. It is preferable to determine that the data in the RAM 41c is normal under the above conditions.

  In the first embodiment, 5AH is stored in the RAM 41c as the failure diagnosis data in the power interruption processing. However, any data other than 0 can be stored and confirmed at the start. Even if it is a simple structure, when all areas are cleared to 0 at the time of startup, the data for destruction diagnosis does not match the value stored at the time of a power failure and is determined to be abnormal, so it is stored in the RAM 41c. It is possible to improve the accuracy of determining abnormalities in existing data.

  In the first embodiment, when the CPU 41a is activated, the RAM parity of the RAM 41c is calculated, it is determined whether the result is 0, and the destructive diagnosis data is stored on the condition that the RAM parity is 0. It is determined whether or not the data is stored normally. First, it is determined whether or not the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally, and the data for destructive diagnosis is stored normally. The RAM parity of the RAM 41c may be calculated and it may be determined whether or not the result is 0. In this way, if the destructive diagnosis data is not normally stored, the RAM parity is calculated. Can be determined that the data in the RAM 41c is abnormal.

  Further, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is normal only when the main control unit 41 is activated, but it may be determined every other opportunity, for example, every game.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 is activated based on a reset signal from a reset circuit 49 provided separately from the main control unit 41, but the reset circuit is replaced with the main control unit 41. The microcomputer which comprises may be mounted.

  In the first embodiment, the RAM 41c is mounted on the microcomputer constituting the main control unit 41. However, a RAM used as a work for the microcomputer may be mounted outside the microcomputer.

  In the first embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the DC voltage used in the slot machine 1 and detects power interruption when the DC voltage becomes a certain voltage or less. The power interruption may be detected when the period in which the DC voltage is equal to or lower than a certain voltage continues for a certain period. Alternatively, the AC voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 may be monitored to detect a power interruption when a disturbance in the waveform of the AC voltage is detected or when the period continues for a certain period.

  In the first embodiment, the power interruption detection circuit 48 is mounted on the game control board 40. However, the power interruption detection circuit 48 may be mounted on other places. For example, the power supply board 100 or the power supply board 100 may be connected to the game control board. It may be mounted on a relay board or the like through which a power supply line to 40 passes.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the error is notified by displaying the error code corresponding to the error state on the game auxiliary display 12 with the contents of various error states. In other words, the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41 is notified, but in addition to the notification means controlled by the game control unit 41, a command indicating an error state is transmitted to the effect control unit 91, The notification means controlled by the control section 91 may notify the error, or the notification means controlled by the game control section 41 does not perform the notification, but the notification means controlled by the effect control section 91 does not. An error notification may be performed.

  Next, a modified example of the configuration of the slot machine will be described.

  In the first embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 65, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, the ball capturing device 30 ′ and the ball capturing device 30 ′ for capturing game balls are used. In addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34 and a payout sensor 35, a ball payout device 34 ′ for paying out a game ball, a ball payout, and the like are provided. A payout ball detection switch 35 ′ for detecting a game ball paid out by the device 34 ′ is provided, and it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using both medals and game balls, and generating a prize. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment is almost the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and only different points will be described here.

  In the first embodiment, when the gaming state is other than the challenge bonus, the winning number of the special combination stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) and the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) are stored as a result of the internal lottery. The storage address of the index data of the stop control data is identified using the winning number of the general role, and if the gaming state is a challenge bonus, the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) is stored as a result of the internal lottery. Index of stop control data using the value (INDEX_CB) for the challenge bonus without using the winning number for the special role stored or the winning number for the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) The data storage address was specified. If the game state is other than the challenge bonus, the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) as a result of the internal lottery and the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) Is converted into a 16-bit binary value in which 1 is set to the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination, and a value obtained by ORing 0000H is set as an abnormal winning determination flag. Set as an internal winning flag to create and if the gaming state is a challenge bonus, the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) as a result of the internal lottery and the general role storage work ( iwin_gen) is converted into a 16-bit binary value in which the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1 using the winning number of the general winning combination stored in iwin_gen), and C000 In other words, an internal winning flag for creating an abnormal winning determination flag using a logical sum of all the small winning combination flags in which 1 is set to the value of the bit corresponding to the uniformly permitted combination in the challenge bonus Was set as.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, at the end of the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the challenge bonus. If it is in the challenge bonus, the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen) is set as the challenge bonus. Renew to a medium-use winning number (a winning number indicating all winnings that are uniformly allowed in the challenge bonus).

  Then, regardless of the gaming state, the special combination winning number stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) and / or the general combination winning number stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) are used to stop. The storage address of the index data of the control data is specified. At this time, if the game state is a challenge bonus, since the winning number for the challenge bonus is stored in the general combination storage work (iwin_gen), the storage address of the index data of the stop control data for the challenge bonus Will be specified.

  In addition, regardless of the game state, the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the winning number of the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) Is converted to a 16-bit binary value in which the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1, and the converted value is set as an internal winning flag for creating an abnormal winning determination flag Yes. At this time, if the game state is a challenge bonus, the winning number for the challenge bonus, that is, the winning number indicating the winning of the uniformly allowed role in the challenge bonus is stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen). Therefore, an internal winning flag indicating a winning of a role that is uniformly allowed in the challenge bonus is set.

  Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the first embodiment, the winning numbers of the general roles stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen) are 00H indicating the loss of the general roles, 01H indicating the winning of the cherry, 02H indicating the winning of the bell, and the winning of the replay. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, in addition to these four types of winning numbers, all the small roles, that is, winnings of both Cherry and Bell are shown. Is stipulated.

  In this embodiment, the winning number of the general role is stored based on the result of the internal lottery. After that, it is determined whether or not it is during the challenge bonus. It is updated to the corresponding 04H. Note that 04H is not stored as the winning number of the general combination except during the challenge bonus.

  In this embodiment, the winning number (00-03H) of the special role stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the winning number (00-04H) of the general role stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen) There are 20 combinations, but the winning numbers corresponding to all small roles among the winning numbers of the general roles are the winning numbers stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) only during the challenge bonus. During the challenge bonus, Since the winning number of the special role is always 0, the combination that can actually be taken is 5 (= 1 × 5, when the winning number of the special role is 0) +12 (= 3 × 4. When the winning numbers of special roles are 1 to 3, the winning numbers of 4 types of general roles are 17), and the ROM 41b has 16 types of stop control corresponding to each of these 17 winning number combinations. For Index data identifiable 17 up (head address) is stored.

  Regardless of the gaming state, stop control data specified from the index data (start address) corresponding to the combination of the 17 winning numbers is selected, and the reel stop control is performed based on the selected stop control data. Will be done.

  Here, the storage state of the stop control data in the ROM 41b of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the ROM 41b of the present embodiment has two index areas (index area and index area 2) in which index data for referring to stop control data is stored, and stop control data. A stored area (hereinafter referred to as a data area) is provided. Note that the top address of the index area 2 is [1000H], which is also expressed as ctrldata_index2. The head address of the index area is [100AH] and is also expressed as ctrldata_index.

  As in the first embodiment, 16 types of stop control data are stored in the data area.

  Also, in the index area and index area 2, as shown in FIG. 67, any one of the 16 types of stop data index data stored in the data area is one of the 17 winning number combinations. Are stored in association with each other.

  The storage order of the 17 types of index data in these index areas will be described. First, in the index area 2, the winning number for the special role is 0, and the winning numbers for the general role are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Five pieces of index data of stop control data corresponding to the five types of combinations are stored in the order of combinations in which the winning number of the general combination is small. Thereafter, similarly, in the index area, when the winning numbers of the special roles are 1, 2, and 3, corresponding to the four types of combinations when the winning numbers of the general roles are 0, 1, 2, and 3, respectively. A total of 12 start addresses of stop control data are stored, four by four. Finally, the index area and index area 2 store a total of 17 pieces of stop control data. Among these, index data of stop control data used during the challenge bonus is stored corresponding to the combination of the winning number 0 for the special combination and the winning number 4 for the general combination.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, when the winning number of the special role is 0, that is, when no special role is won, the value stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) ( By performing the calculation [ctrldata_index2 + 2 × general winning number], the address of the storage area where the index data of the stop control data corresponding to the winning number combination is stored is specified. The stop control data can be acquired.

  In addition, when the winning number of the special role is 1 to 3, that is, when any special role is won, the value stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) (the winning number of the special role) and the general role By performing a calculation [ctrldata_index + 2 × {4 × (Special Role Winning Number-1) + General Role Winning Number}] using the value stored in the stored work (iwin_gen) (General Winning Number) The address of the storage area where the index data of stop control data corresponding to the combination of winning numbers is stored can be specified, and the stop control data can be acquired.

  Next, conversion of the internal winning flag in the present embodiment will be described.

  In this embodiment, after the internal lottery is completed, the CPU 41a performs the internal lottery based on the number / flag conversion table stored in the ROM 41b in advance for each of the special combination winning number and the general winning combination number indicating the result. It is converted into a 16-bit binary value in which 1 is set to the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination. Then, the converted value is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag. In particular, during the challenge bonus, 04H indicating the winning of all the small roles is stored as the winning number of the general character, so it is converted into an internal winning flag in which 1 is set to the value of the bit corresponding to all the small roles. The Rukoto. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal winning flag by a common process regardless of whether the gaming state is during the challenge bonus or not.

  In this embodiment, although not particularly shown, a number / flag conversion table for general roles and a number / flag conversion table for special roles are provided. In the present embodiment, the number / flag conversion table for general roles has five types of values for the winning numbers for general roles, so that five internal winning flags corresponding to the winning numbers for each general role are: Data in a total of 10 addresses (10 bytes) is stored in the order of increasing winning numbers, that is, in the order of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 in increments of 2 addresses (2 bytes). In particular, the winning number is stored only during the challenge bonus, and the address corresponding to the winning number 4 that indicates the winning of all the roles that are uniformly allowed during the challenge bonus is uniformly allowed during the challenge bonus. [C000H] in which the value of the bit corresponding to all the combinations (cherry, bell) is 1 is stored separately in [C0H] which is the upper 8 bits and [00H] which is the lower 8 bits. The number / flag conversion table for the special role is the same as that of the first embodiment, but the data corresponding to the winning number 4 is stored in the number / flag conversion table for the general role. The start address (iwflag_table_b) of the number / flag conversion table is [200AH].

  As described above, in this embodiment, during the challenge bonus, the winning numbers are stored only in the general bonus storage work (iwin_gen) during the challenge bonus, and all winnings that are uniformly allowed during the challenge bonus are indicated. Since the winning number 4 is stored and the data corresponding to the winning number 4 is stored in the general-use number / flag conversion table, the converted value from the general-use number / flag conversion table is further stored. There is no need to logically OR the data according to the game state ([0000H] and all small role winning flags [C000H]), and the converted value is directly used as an internal winning flag in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag). Can be stored.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal lottery process executed by the CPU 41a in this embodiment.

  The internal lottery process of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the winning number of the general combination is updated to a value corresponding to all small combinations (04H) when the challenge bonus is being applied. For this reason, in the present embodiment, steps Sg22 and Sg23 are added to the flowchart (FIG. 35) of the first embodiment.

  First, the CPU 41a performs a lottery process based on the same random number as in the first embodiment in steps Sg1 to Sg20. As a result, the lottery is performed without considering whether or not the challenge bonus is in effect, and the result is stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) and the general combination storing work (iwin_gen).

  Then, after the lottery is completed, the process proceeds to step Sg22 to determine whether or not the challenge bonus is in effect. If the challenge bonus is in effect, the process proceeds to step Sg23, and if not, the process proceeds to step Sg21.

  In step Sg23, the winning number 04H corresponding to all small combinations is stored in the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) of the RAM 41c, and the process proceeds to step Sg21.

  In step Sg21, the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen), that is, the winning number of the general combination is stored in the B register, and the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after a lottery of a target combination or combination of roles in accordance with the gaming state, it is determined whether or not a challenge bonus is in effect. The value of the stored work (iwin_gen) is uniquely rewritten to the winning number 04H corresponding to all small roles regardless of the winning result of the general role in the internal lottery.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the stop control data selection process executed by the CPU 41a in this embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery process, when the challenge bonus is in effect, the winning number 4 of the general role set only during the challenge bonus is stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen). In the stop control data selection process, it is not necessary to perform different processes depending on whether or not the challenge bonus is being performed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, steps Sh1 to Sh7, which are processes according to whether or not the challenge bonus is being performed, are omitted in the flowchart (FIG. 37) of the first embodiment. Further, when the special combination is not carried over, the calculation for calculating the index data of the stop control data from the winning number of the general combination is different from that in the first embodiment, so steps Sh22 to Sh28 are added.

  In the first embodiment, the CPU 41a performs steps Sh8 to Sh10, stores the value of iwin_bonus (special role winning number) in the A register (Sh8), adds the A registers to each other (Sh9), The A registers are added again (Sh10), and then the value of iwin_gen (general role winning number) stored in the B register is added to the A register. + Winning number of general role] is stored.

  However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the value stored in the A register and the index area depending on whether the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) is 0 or 1 to 3. It is necessary to change the start address of.

  Therefore, in the step of Sh22, a logical sum (OR) of the A registers storing the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculation result is 0 in the step of Sh23. Yes. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) is 0, the process proceeds to step Sh24. If the calculation result is not 0, that is, the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) When the value is 1 to 3 other than 0, the process proceeds to step Sh28.

  In the step of Sh24, that is, when the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) is 0, the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen) stored in the B register (the winning number of the general role) is stored in the A register. By adding, [0 + general winning number] is stored in the A register. The subsequent steps Sh25 to Sh27 are the same processing contents as the steps Sh12 to Sh14 in the first embodiment. However, the start address of the index area of the stop control data stored in the HL register in the step of Sh27 is the start address (ctgrldata_index2) of the index area 2 in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the step of Sh28, that is, when the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) is 1 to 3 other than 0, the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) (the winning number of the special role) is stored. 1 is subtracted from the A register (Sh28), the A registers are added together (Sh9), the A registers are added again (Sh10), and then the value of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) stored in the B register By adding (general winning number) to the A register, [4 × (special winning number-1) + general winning number] is stored in the A register (Sh11). Subsequent steps Sh12 to Sh21 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the stop control data selection process according to the present embodiment, the start address of the stop control data is based on the winning number (the winning number for the special role and / or the winning number for the general role) regardless of the gaming state. Is selected and this address is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr).

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning flag storage process executed by the CPU 41a in this embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning flag storing process, when the challenge bonus is in effect, the winning number 4 of the general role that is set only during the challenge bonus is stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen). Thus, in the winning flag storing process, there is no need to perform different processes depending on whether or not a challenge bonus is being performed. For this reason, in this embodiment, the steps of Si17 to Si20 in the flowchart (FIG. 38) of the first embodiment are omitted. There is no additional step.

  As described above, in the winning flag storing process of the present embodiment, the winning number (the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role) is set to the value of the bit corresponding to the winning role regardless of the gaming state. The value is converted into a 16-bit binary value in which 1 is set, and the converted value is stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag indicating a winning permitted in the game.

  As described above, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, a special role lottery is performed regardless of whether any one special role or general role is won or both special roles and general roles are won. The winning number of the special role that increases by 1 each for the result and the winning number of the general role that increases by 1 for each of the general lottery results are set, so based on these two types of values Address of the index area ([ctrldata_index2 + 2 × general winning number if the winning number of special role is 0], [ctrldata_index + 2 × {4 × (winning number of special role) if the winning number of special role is other than 0 -1) + general winning number}]) is calculated, and the stop control data specified from the index data stored in the storage area starting from the calculated index area address is It only has to be selected as the game stop control data, and when selecting the stop control data, it is not necessary to check the winning flag bits for all winnings as in the prior art, so the stop control data is selected. The processing at the time can be simplified.

  In addition, since the winning number for the special role and the winning number for the general role are values that increase by one, that is, a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), Rather than using a winning flag in which the assigned bit is 1, that is, a value that does not increase regularly, the address of the table index for specifying the stop control data can be calculated by simple calculation. In particular, in the case where the table index is stored in the index area at regular intervals as in this embodiment, the address of the table index can be calculated by a simpler calculation. Further, since table data that defines the correspondence between the result of the internal lottery and the storage address of the index data is not necessary, the program capacity can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when no special role is carried over, [ctrldata_index2 + 2 × winning number of general role] is calculated using the value stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen), When any special role is carried over, the value stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the value stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) are used to calculate [ctrldata_index + 2 × The storage address of the index data of the stop control data corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is specified by performing the calculation of {4 × (special role winning number −1) + general role winning number}]. In other words, different operations are performed depending on whether or not the special role is carried over, but in correspondence with each of the winning numbers (0, 1, 2, 3) of the special role in the index area starting from one address (ctrldata_index) The table index when combined with the winning numbers (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) of general roles is stored in order, and always [ctrldata_index + 2 x (5 x special role winning number + general role winning number) )], The storage address of the index data of the stop control data corresponding to the result of the internal lottery may be specified. In such a case, is the special role carried over? Regardless of whether or not, it is possible to specify the storage address of the index data for the stop control data simply by performing the calculation using the winning number of the special role and the winning number of the general role. . That is, it is possible to always specify the storage address of the index data of the stop control data by a common method.

  Also, during the challenge bonus where all small roles (Cherry, Bell) are uniformly allowed, the winning number set only during the challenge bonus regardless of whether or not the target role is won by internal lottery. Yes, since the winning numbers of the general roles indicating the winnings of all the small roles that are uniformly allowed in the challenge bonus are stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen), when selecting the stop control data, Regardless of the status, it becomes possible to specify the index data of stop control data in a common process based on the winning number (special role winning number and / or general role winning number), and abnormal winning determination data Even if you set the internal winning flag to create a game, based on the winning number (special role winning number and / or general role winning number) regardless of the gaming state In the process of passing, it is possible to set the internal winning flag. In other words, regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the challenge bonus, the processes after the internal lottery such as the process of selecting the index data for the stop control data, the process of setting the internal winning flag, and the process of determining abnormal winnings are shared. Therefore, these processes do not become complicated due to the difference in the gaming state.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment (for example, the abnormal winning determination configuration, etc.) has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  For example, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number is obtained using the number / flag conversion table (FIG. 13) in which the value of the internal winning flag corresponding to the winning number is stored. In this case, the abnormal winning determination data is set by inverting the internal winning flag, but the internal winning flag is calculated by the calculation using the value of the winning number in the same manner as shown in FIG. Further, the abnormal winning determination data may be set by inverting the internal winning flag. In the second embodiment, the value indicating all small roles in the challenge bonus is set as the winning number of the general role. In this case, the same case as when the general role is won in other than the challenge bonus is used. Even if calculation is performed using the winning number of the general role, it cannot be converted into an internal winning flag indicating all small roles, so when the challenge bonus is in effect (when 04H is stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen)) In the case of the internal winning flag corresponding to all the small combinations (in the case of the internal winning flag shown in FIG. 60 (c)), the upper 8-bit value corresponding to the general combination is 03H, that is, cherry. The corresponding 0th bit and the value corresponding to the 1st bit corresponding to the bell may be directly converted into 1).

  In this way, if the game state is at least other than the challenge bonus, the internal winning flag is obtained simply by performing the calculation using the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen). In addition to the ability to create both abnormal winning determination flags, there is no need for table data that defines the correspondence between internal lottery results and internal winning flags or abnormal winning determination flags, thus reducing program capacity. You can also.

  Also, in the above, the internal lottery result is first converted into an internal winning flag by calculation, and then an abnormal winning determination flag is set by performing an inversion operation. However, the internal lottery result is directly calculated by abnormal calculation. It may be possible to convert it to a judgment flag. In this case as well, an abnormal winning judgment is made simply by performing an operation using the value of the special role storing work (iwin_bonus) and the value of the general role storing work (iwin_gen). In addition to the ability to create a flag for the game, it is not necessary to have table data that defines the correspondence between the results of the internal lottery and the abnormal winning determination flag, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment is almost the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and only different points will be described here.

  In the first embodiment, the winning numbers of the general roles stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen) are 00H indicating the loss of the general roles, 01H indicating the winning of the cherry, 02H indicating the winning of the bell, and the winning of the replay. In the present example, as in the case of Example 2, 00H indicating the loss of the general role, 01H indicating the cherry win, 02H indicating the bell win, and the replay win There are 5 types, 03H, indicating 04 and 04H indicating winning of all small roles.

  In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, at the end of the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the challenge bonus. The value is updated to a winning number for winning the challenge bonus (a winning number indicating winning of all the roles that are uniformly allowed in the challenge bonus).

  In the first embodiment, when the game state is other than the challenge bonus, the special combination winning number and the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) as a result of the internal lottery are displayed. The storage address of the index data of the stop control data is specified using the stored winning number of the general combination. If the gaming state is a challenge bonus, the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus ) Data for stop control using the value (INDEX_CB) for the challenge bonus without using the winning number for the special role stored in) or the winning number for the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) The storage address of the index data is identified, and the specified storage address is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr) for stop control. It had to be able to get the over data.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not 04H indicating the winning of all the small roles is stored in the general role storing work (iwin_gen). If 04H is not stored, the result of the internal lottery is determined. Storage of index data of stop control data using the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the general role winning number stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) If the address is specified and 04H is stored, the value (INDEX_CB = 16) for specifying the start address of the stop control data stored at the end of the index area is used [ctrldata_index + 2 × INDEX_CB] is determined to identify the storage address for the stop control data for the challenge bonus, and the specified storage address is used as the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr ), The stop control data can be acquired. If it is determined that 04H indicating the winning of all small roles is stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen), the calculation using [INDEX_CB = 16] is performed to perform stop control data for the challenge bonus Rather than specifying the storage address, the storage address of the stop control data for the challenge bonus described in the program is stored in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr) to obtain the stop control data You may do it.

  In the first embodiment, when the game state is other than the challenge bonus, the special combination winning number and the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) as a result of the internal lottery are displayed. Using the stored winning number of the general combination, the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is converted to a 16-bit binary value in which 1 is set, and further a logical sum of 0000H, Set as an internal winning flag for creating an abnormal winning determination flag, and when the gaming state is a challenge bonus, the winning number of the special combination stored in the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) (be sure to be 00H) ) And the winning number of the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) (which must be 00H), the 16 bits in which the value of the bit corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1 In addition, C000H, that is, a value obtained by logically summing all small combination winning flags in which the value of the bit corresponding to the uniformly allowed combination in the challenge bonus is set to 1, is abnormal. It was stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag) as an internal winning flag for creating a winning determination flag.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the number / flag conversion table stores data corresponding to the winning number 4 of the general combination indicating the winning of all the small combinations, and the result of the internal lottery. Based on the number / flag conversion table, using the winning number of the special role stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the winning number of the general role stored in the general role storage work (iwin_gen) as It is converted to a 16-bit binary value in which the bit value corresponding to the winning combination is set to 1, and the converted value is stored as an internal winning flag in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag). Yes.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when 04H indicating the winning of all small roles is not set in the general role storing work (iwin_gen), is any one special role or general role selected? Regardless of whether or not both the special role and the general role are won, the value increases by +1. The special role winning number stored in the special role storage work (iwin_bonus) and the general role storage work (iwin_gen) ) Stored with the winning number of the general combination stored in (2), that is, the value uniquely assigned to the result of the internal lottery [4 × the winning number of the special combination + the winning number of the general combination] Based on this value, the index area address [ctrldata_index + 2 × {4 × (special role winning number-1) + general role winning number}] is calculated, and the calculated index area address is the head. The stop control data specified from the index data stored in the storage area may be selected as the stop control data for the game, and when selecting the stop control data, all the winnings as in the past are selected. Since it is not necessary to check the bit of the winning flag, the process for selecting the stop control data can be simplified.

  In addition, since the value uniquely assigned to the result of the internal lottery is a value that increases by one, that is, a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), it was won as before. It is possible to calculate the address of the table index for specifying stop control data by simple calculation rather than using a winning flag with 1 assigned to the winning prize, that is, a value that does not increase regularly. It becomes. In particular, in the case where the table index is stored in the index area at regular intervals as in this embodiment, the address of the table index can be calculated by a simpler calculation. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers for the special roles and the winning numbers for the general roles are each increased by one, so the values uniquely assigned to the results of the internal lottery from these values are also included. It can be easily calculated.

  In addition, when 04H indicating the winning of all small roles is set in the general role storing work (iwin_gen), it is only necessary to select the stop control data for the challenge bonus unambiguously. Even if the challenge bonus is acceptable, the processing for selecting the stop control data is not complicated.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configuration (for example, the configuration of abnormal winning determination, etc.) to the first embodiment or the second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. Further, the modified examples illustrated for the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

  Embodiment 4 of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment is almost the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and only different points will be described here.

  In the first embodiment, as a result of the internal lottery, the winning number of the special role is stored in the special role storing work (iwin_bonus), and the winning number of the general role is stored in the general role temporary storing work (iwin_gen). In the present embodiment, a winning number uniquely determined for the combination of the winning result of the special role and the winning result of the general role is stored in the winning number storing work assigned to the RAM 41c.

  Specifically, the winning number is 00H indicating that neither special role nor any general role has been won, 01H indicating that Cherry, Bell, or Replay has been won without any special role being selected, 02H, 03H, 04H showing that the big bonus (1) has been won, and 04H indicating that the small bonus has not been won, and that Cherry, Bell, Replay has been won with the big bonus (1) being won 05H, 06H, 07H, Big Bonus (2) won, 08H showing that no small role has been won, Cherry, Bell, Replay won with Big Bonus (2) won 09H, 0AH, 0BH indicating that the bonus has been won, 0CH indicating that the small role has not been won while the challenge bonus has been won, and the challenge bonus being won Ferry, Bell, 0DH indicating that the replay was elected, 0EH, 0FH, all small role in a state that is not even won any of the special role is assigned 10H indicating that was elected.

  In the present embodiment, in a gaming state other than the challenge bonus, any winning number from 00H to 0FH is set as the winning number storing work in accordance with the result of the internal lottery. Also, in the challenge bonus, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, 10H indicating that all the small roles have been won without any special role being won is set as the winning number in the winning number storing work. It has become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, 16 stop corresponding to the 16 combinations that can be taken by the lottery result of the special role and the lottery result of the general role in the index area of the stop control data. After storing the start address of the control data, the start address of the stop control data used during the challenge bonus is stored.

  In this embodiment, by using the winning number stored in the winning number storing work, calculating the storage address [ctrldata_index + 2 × winning number] of the index data of the stop control data, the stop control corresponding to the winning number is performed. By specifying the data storage address and storing the specified storage address in the stop control data storage work (ctrldata_ptr), the stop control data can be acquired. In particular, since 10H is set as the winning number during the challenge bonus, the start address of the stop control data used during the challenge bonus is acquired.

  Further, in this embodiment, the internal winning in which the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 1 and the value of the bit assigned to the non-winning winning is 0 corresponding to each of the winning numbers. It has a conversion table in which a flag is stored. Using the conversion table, the winning number is converted into an internal winning flag and stored in the internal winning flag storage work (iwin_flag). In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the values of all the bits of the internal winning flag are inverted and converted into an abnormal winning determination flag, and an abnormal winning determination process is performed.

  In correspondence with each winning number, an abnormal winning determination flag is stored in which the value of the bit assigned to the winning combination is 0 and the value of the bit assigned to the non-winning combination is 1. The conversion table may be used, and the winning number may be directly converted to the abnormal winning determination flag using the conversion table, and used for the abnormal winning determination processing.

  Alternatively, the winning number may be converted into an abnormal winning determination flag by performing an operation using the winning number, and used for the abnormal winning determination process. In this case, for example, in the configuration of the internal winning flag shown in FIG. 60, when the winning number is 00H, all the bits of the winning flag for the special role and the winning flag for the general role are set to 0, and the special role is set for 01H to 03H. All the bits of the winning flag are set to 0, the value of the least significant bit of the general combination is set to 1, and the winning flag bit of the general combination is shifted according to the value indicated by [winning number-1]. In 07H, the least significant bit of the special role winning flag is set to 1. In 04H, all the bits of the winning flag of the general role are set to 0. In 05H to 07H, the general selection is made according to the value indicated by [Winning number-4-1]. The winning flag bit of the role is shifted. When the winning numbers are 08H to 0BH, the least significant bit of the winning flag of the special role is set to 1, and the bit of the winning flag of the special role is further shifted by 1 and when the winning number is 08H All bits of the flag are set to 0. In 09H to 0BH, the winning flag bit of the general role is shifted according to the value indicated by [Winning number -8-1]. When the winning number is 0CH to 0FH, the special role is won. The least significant bit of the flag is set to 1 and the winning flag bit of the special role is further shifted by 2 and all the bits of the winning flag of the general role are set to 0 for 0CH, and [Winning Number-12-1] indicates 0DH to 0FH. If the winning flag bit of the general role is shifted according to the value, when the winning number is 10H, all the bits of the winning flag of the special role are set to 0, and the value of the least significant bit of the general role is set to 1, The value obtained by shifting 1 by setting the value of the least significant bit of the combination as 1 is logically ORed. Then, what is obtained by inverting all bits of the internal winning flag obtained by these calculations may be used as the abnormal winning determination flag.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is a value that increases by +1 regardless of whether any one special role or general role is won, or whether both the special role and general role are won, A winning number uniquely assigned to the result of the internal lottery is set, and an index area address [ctrldata_index + 2 × winning number] is calculated based on the winning number, and the calculated index area address is The stop control data specified from the index data stored in the storage area at the head may be selected as the stop control data for the game, and when selecting the stop control data, Since it is not necessary to check the bit of the winning flag for winning, the process for selecting the stop control data can be simplified.

  In addition, since the winning number is a value that increases by one, that is, a value that regularly increases by n (n is a positive integer), the bit assigned to the winning prize won as in the conventional case is set to 1. Rather than using a winning flag, that is, a value that does not increase regularly, it is possible to calculate the address of a table index for specifying stop control data by simple calculation. In particular, in the case where the table index is stored in the index area at regular intervals as in this embodiment, the address of the table index can be calculated by a simpler calculation.

  In addition, during the challenge bonus, a winning number indicating the winning of all the small roles is set when no special role is won, so regardless of the game state, the winning number is used for indexing in a common process. Data can be selected or converted to an internal winning flag by common processing. In other words, regardless of the game state, it is possible to share the process of specifying these index data, the process of converting to an internal winning flag, the process of determining abnormal winnings, etc. It will not become.

  As described above, the fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configuration (for example, abnormal winning determination configuration, etc.) to the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment is the same as that described in the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment. It has an effect. Further, the modified examples illustrated for the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the third embodiment are also applicable to the fourth embodiment.

It is a front view of the slot machine of Example 1 to which the present invention was applied. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. (A) is a figure showing composition of special role storing work (iwin_bonus). (B) is a figure which shows the structure of a general role storing work (iwin_gen). (A) is a figure showing a winning combination table. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a role-specific table according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the memory area of the number of judgment values acquired based on the address registered into the role classification table of Example 1. FIG. (A) (b) in the normal gaming state, (c) in the challenge bonus, (d) in the regular bonus, the number of random numbers for internal lottery and the number of judgment values of each combination, It is a figure which shows the example of each relationship. (A) is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a random number generation circuit. (B) is an explanatory diagram until the CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into a random number for internal lottery by software. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data for stop control stored in ROM41b of Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the data selection process for stop control of Example 1, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the data selection process for stop control of Example 1, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the abnormal winning determination process of Example 1, and the storing condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. 6 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a number / flag conversion table stored in a ROM 41b according to the first embodiment. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the winning flag conversion process of Example 1, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the winning flag conversion process of Example 1, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the structure of the storage area of RAM of a main control part. (A) is a figure which shows the area | region initialized in initialization 1-4 performed by CPU of a main control part. (B) is a figure which shows the initialization table stored in ROM of the main control part. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the period when the setting of a bet number is permitted, and the period when adjustment of credit is permitted. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of the bet number is allowed, the period in which the settlement of credits is allowed, and the BB winning effect (ending effect). It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the period in which the setting of a bet number is permitted, the period in which credit settlement is allowed, and the ending effect. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the error process performed when CPU of a main control part generate | occur | produces an error. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the setting change process which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which CPU of a main control part performs after a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the BET process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game control process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the adjustment process which CPU of a main control part performs in BET processing etc. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the random number acquisition process which CPU of a main control part performs in an internal lottery process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a stop control data selection process executed by the CPU of the main control unit in the game process in the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart showing the control contents of a winning flag storing process executed by the CPU of the main control unit in the game process in the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the reel rotation process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of winning which CPU of a main control part performs in a winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the process at the time of the game completion which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the production waiting process which CPU of the main control part performs in the process at the time of a game end. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process periodically performed by CPU of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process periodically performed by CPU of a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the interruption interruption process performed when CPU of a main control part inputs a voltage drop signal from an interruption detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 1 which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the RAM clear process which CPU of the main control part performs in initialization 1-4. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 2 which CPU of a main control part performs at the time of the end of a big bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 3 which CPU of a main control part performs in a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the initialization 4 which CPU of a main control part performs whenever one game is complete | finished. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the starting process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which CPU of a sub control part performs regularly. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the control pattern setting process which CPU of a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 1, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 1, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of the winning determination process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 1, and the storage condition of the register | resistor used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is a figure which shows the example of the flow of the control content of the modification of the winning flag storing process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 1, and the storing condition of the register used at that time, ROM41b, and RAM41c. It is explanatory drawing of the 1st modification of a process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. It is explanatory drawing of the 2nd modification of the process until CPU processes the random number extracted from the random number generation circuit into the random number for internal lottery by software. (A) is a figure which shows the modification of the storage area of RAM in a main control part. (B) is a figure which shows the modification of an initialization table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the initialization 1 which CPU of a main control part performs. It is a block diagram which shows the modification of a structure of a slot machine. (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the special combination storing work (iwin_bonus) used for Example 2. FIG. (B) is a figure which shows the structure of the general combination storing work (iwin_gen) used for Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data for stop control stored in ROM41b used for Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 2. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control content of a stop control data selection process executed by the CPU of the main control unit in the game process in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning flag storing process which CPU of a main control part performs in a game process in Example 2. FIG.

Explanation of symbols

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 40 Game control board 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
42 Random Number Generation Circuit 43 Sampling Circuit 90 Production Control Board 91 Sub Control Unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (8)

A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each game Is a slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
It is means for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device is derived, and it is possible to determine that a plurality of types of winnings are allowed per game. A pre-determination means;
n is a value that increases by n (n is a positive integer), and corresponds to the determination result of the predetermination means from a plurality of determination numbers uniquely determined corresponding to the determination result of the predetermination means A decision number setting means for setting a decision number;
Data storage means including a derivation control data storage area for storing derivation control data used when the variable display device derives a display result;
An address calculation means for calculating an address corresponding to the determination number, which is an address assigned to a storage area of the data storage means, using the determination number set by the determination number setting means;
Derivation control data selection means for selecting derivation control data corresponding to the decision number from derivation control data stored in the derivation control data storage area based on the address calculated by the address calculation means;
Derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result based on the derivation control data selected by the derivation control data selection means;
Abnormal winning determination that sets abnormal winning determination data that can specify whether or not the winning is permitted in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the determination result of the prior determination means Data setting means,
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the derived display result is set Winning result data setting means,
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means When,
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means;
And a storage area for unused area and the data read and writable stores never read and write of data is performed, stores the decision number corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination unit as the storage area A work area in which data for controlling a game including a decision number storage area to be stored and a stack area in which data can be temporarily stored are allocated and data storage means;
Data saving means for temporarily saving data in use in the stack area;
Data restoration means for restoring data saved in the stack area by the saving means;
An unused stack area specifying means for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Initializing an area defined in accordance with the type of initialization condition established among the storage areas in the data storage means when any of the initialization conditions among a plurality of types of initialization conditions is established And
With
The data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization unit initializes the unused area and the unused stack area even when any of the plurality of types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and corresponds to two or more types of initialization conditions. An initialization area setting unit in which an initialization start address in the data storage unit is set and an initialization end address common to the initialization condition is set, and when the initialization condition is satisfied, a storage area each address is allocated from the set initial initiation address to the initialization area setting means to said end of initialization address initialized in response to the kind of conditions,
The unused area and the unused stack area of the stack area are allocated to storage areas with consecutive addresses,
In the initialization area setting means, an address indicating a boundary between the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means and the stack area in use is set as an initialization end address.
A slot machine characterized by that. A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value, and a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each game Is a slot machine in which one game is ended by being derived and displayed, and a winning can be generated according to the display result of the variable display device,
It is means for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before the display result of the variable display device is derived, and it is possible to determine that a plurality of types of winnings are allowed per game. A pre-determination means;
n is a value that increases by n (n is a positive integer), and corresponds to the determination result of the predetermination means from a plurality of determination numbers uniquely determined corresponding to the determination result of the predetermination means A decision number setting means for setting a decision number;
Data storage means including a derivation control data storage area for storing derivation control data used when the variable display device derives a display result;
An address calculation means for calculating an address corresponding to the determination number, which is an address assigned to a storage area of the data storage means, using the determination number set by the determination number setting means;
Derivation control data selection means for selecting derivation control data corresponding to the decision number from derivation control data stored in the derivation control data storage area based on the address calculated by the address calculation means;
Derivation control means for performing control to cause the variable display device to derive a display result based on the derivation control data selected by the derivation control data selection means;
Abnormal winning determination that sets abnormal winning determination data that can specify whether or not the winning is permitted in the game for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the determination result of the prior determination means Data setting means,
After the display result of the variable display device is derived, winning result data that can specify whether or not the winning has occurred for each bit assigned for each type of winning based on the derived display result is set Winning result data setting means,
Calculation means for calculating the value of bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means When,
Abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormal winning based on the value of each bit calculated by the calculating means;
And a storage area for unused area and the data read and writable stores never read and write of data is performed, stores the decision number corresponding to the determination result of the pre-determination unit as the storage area A data storage means to which at least a work area in which data for controlling a game including a decision number storage area to be stored is stored, and a stack area in which data can be temporarily stored, are allocated;
Data saving means for temporarily saving data in use in the stack area;
Data restoration means for restoring data saved in the stack area by the saving means;
An unused stack area specifying means for specifying an unused stack area in which the data saved by the data saving means is not stored in the stack area;
Initializing an area defined in accordance with the type of initialization condition established among the storage areas in the data storage means when any of the initialization conditions among a plurality of types of initialization conditions is established And
With
The data storage means is assigned an address for specifying a storage area,
The initialization unit initializes the unused area and the unused stack area even when any of the plurality of types of initialization conditions is satisfied, and the data storage unit corresponds to the type of initialization condition. And an initialization area setting means in which a size of a storage area initialized with respect to the initialization start address is set, and when the initialization condition is satisfied, the type of the initialization condition the storage area of the size set for the initialization starting address from the set initialization starting address to the initialization area setting means in response to initialize,
The unused area and the unused stack area of the stack area are allocated to storage areas with consecutive addresses,
In the initialization area setting means, a size according to the unused stack area specified by the unused stack area specifying means is set,
A slot machine characterized by that. The abnormal winning determination data setting means, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, out of the bits assigned for each type of winning, the value of the bit assigned to the winning allowed in the game 0 is set, and abnormal winning determination data is set with the value of a bit assigned to a winning not allowed in the game being set to 1,
The winning result data setting means includes a bit assigned to a winning generated based on the derived display result among the bits assigned for each kind of winning after the display result of the variable display device is derived. 1 is set, and winning result data in which the value of a bit assigned to a winning that has not occurred based on the derived display result is set to 0,
The arithmetic means is a value between bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. And AND
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when there is at least one value other than 0 among the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means;
The slot machine according to claim 1 or 2 , characterized by the above-mentioned. The abnormal winning determination data setting means, based on the determination result of the prior determination means, out of the bits assigned for each type of winning, the value of the bit assigned to the winning allowed in the game 1 is set for abnormal winning determination data in which the value of a bit assigned to a winning that is not permitted in the game is 0,
The winning result data setting means includes a bit assigned to a winning generated based on the derived display result among the bits assigned for each kind of winning after the display result of the variable display device is derived. The winning result data is set to 0, and the value of the bit assigned to the winning that has not occurred based on the derived display result is set to 1,
The arithmetic means is a value between bits to which the same type of winning is assigned in the abnormal winning determination data set by the abnormal winning determination data setting means and the winning result data set by the winning result data setting means. Is ORed,
The abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning when there is at least one of the values of each bit calculated by the calculating means.
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3 . Based on the determination result of the pre-determining means, among the bits allocated for each type of winning, the value of the bit allocated to the winning allowed in the game is set to 1, which is not allowed in the game First data setting means for setting first data in which the value of a bit assigned to winning is set to 0;
The abnormal winning determination data setting means calculates second data by performing an operation of inverting 1 and 0 of each bit of the first data set by the first data setting means, Second data is set as the abnormal winning determination data,
The slot machine according to claim 3 . An abnormal winning determination data storage means for storing the abnormal winning determination data corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means,
The abnormal winning determination data setting means sets the abnormal winning determination data stored in the abnormal winning determination data storage means corresponding to the determination result of the prior determination means;
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 . A determination result storage unit that stores determination result information that is a value that can specify whether or not it is determined by the pre-determination unit that the occurrence of a winning is permitted;
The abnormal winning determination data setting means calculates the abnormal winning determination data by performing a predetermined calculation using a value stored in the determination result storage means, and calculates the abnormal winning determination data. Set the data,
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4 . Special decision result that stores special decision result information that is a value that can specify whether or not it is decided by the prior decision means to allow the occurrence of a special prize accompanying the transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player Storage means;
Normal determination result storage means for storing normal determination result information that is a value that can specify whether or not it is determined by the prior determination means that the occurrence of a normal winning other than the special winning is permitted;
Normal determination result information setting means for setting the normal determination result information by the prior determination means of the game in the normal determination result storage means for each game;
When it is determined by the predetermining means that the special winning is permitted, the special determination result storing means is allowed to generate the special winning determined by the predetermining means of the game. Special decision result information that can specify the effect is set, and the special decision result information is maintained until the permitted special prize is generated, and when the special prize is generated, the special decision result storage means, Special decision result information setting means for setting special decision result information capable of specifying that the occurrence of the special prize is not allowed;
With
The determination number setting means calculates the determination number by performing a predetermined calculation using the value stored in the special determination result storage means and the value stored in the normal determination result storage means. And set the calculated decision number,
The slot machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7 .

Images